Introduction
User Manuals
Safety Precautions
Chapter 1 Before Use
Chapter 2 Camera Setup
Chapter 3 Setting the Camera Angle
- Flow for the Setting of the Camera Angle
  - Step 1 Configuring the Camera Before Setting the Camera Angle
  - Step 2 Setting the Camera Angle and Focus
- Setting the Camera Angle
Chapter 4 Camera Viewer
Chapter 5 Setting Page
Chapter 6 Appendix

Canon VB-H651V User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for VB-H651V by Canon which is a product in the Security Cameras category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon EF 85mm f/1.8 USM Manual

Canon 5D + EF 24-105mm + EF 100-400mm Kit Manual

Canon 105 Manual

Canon MF3010 Manual

Canon LBP7010C Manual

This User Manual should be read before using the network camera.

ENGLISH

Network Camera

Operation Guide

Thank you for purchasing a Canon Network Camera (hereafter referred to as the camera)*.

This “Operation Guide” explains the camera settings and operations. Read this guide carefully before using the camera to

ensure correct use. Also, be sure to read the files in the LICENSE folder on the Setup CD-ROM.

* The cameras described in this guide may include models not be sold in your country and region.

For the latest information on this product (firmware and included software, user manuals, operating environment, etc.),

please refer to the Canon website.

Precautions for Use (Disclaimer)

Disclaimer

To the full extent permitted by laws and regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be

responsible for any financial losses that may be incurred as a result of the loss of recorded information or images,

regardless of the internal or external cause of the loss.

EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING THE CAMERA AND WITHOUT

DETRACTING FROM ANY RIGHTS A CONSUMER MAY BE ENTITLED TO, AND TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED

BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS: (1) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES MAKE

ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THE MATERIAL IN THIS MANUAL OR

WITH REGARD TO THE USE OF THE CAMERA INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES AS TO

MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR NON-

INFRINGEMENT AND (2) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES SHALL BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE RESULTING FROM

THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL OR THE CAMERA.

Network Security

The user is responsible for the network security of this product and its use.

Take appropriate network security measures to avoid security breaches. To the full extent permitted by laws and

regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be liable for any losses, direct, incidental

or consequential damages, or liabilities that may be incurred as a result of network security incidents such as

unauthorized accesses.

• Change the password of the camera periodically.

• Change the HTTP or HTTPS port number of the camera.

• Limit access to the camera by network devices.

LEGAL NOTICE

The user is responsible for compliance with all applicable laws and regulations governing privacy protection and

publicity rights implicated by the use of this product. In some cases, camera and/or audio monitoring or recording

may be restricted or prohibited by the law or regulation, the details of which differ by country and region. Before

installing the product, users should consult the laws and regulations of their country and region, including state and/

or local laws and regulations in such country and region, to ensure that the product is installed in a manner compliant

with all applicable legal requirements. The built-in microphone should be switched off if required by local law or

regulation. Do not install the product in any spaces where occupants or visitors may reasonably have an expectation

of privacy, such as bedrooms, dressing rooms and rest rooms.

The product should be installed in such a manner that it is clearly visible to all persons whose images and voices are

monitored by the product. In addition, signage prominently displayed in close proximity to the product and clearly

Introduction

visible to all persons monitored by the product should inform such persons that the product records both their

images and their conversations.

Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable in any way in the event of a dispute between any user and any third

party concerning the installation of the product or camera and/or audio monitoring or recording.

Copyright

Videos, images or sounds recorded with your camera may not be utilized or published without consent of copyright

holders, if any, except in such a way as permitted for personal use under the relevant copyright law.

Use of Included RM-Lite Software

Flaws or other problems with RM-Lite may result in recording failure or destruction or loss of recorded data. Canon

shall have no liability whatsoever for any loss or damages incurred by the user as a result of such problems.

Product Parts Life

Movable parts of this product (e.g., pan/tilt mechanism) as well as its electronic components may require

replacement at an earlier period, according to where the product is installed, and how it is used.

Please refer to the Canon website for a reference as to the lifespan of the parts in relation to how the product is used.

License Agreement for Included Software

For information on the License Agreement for Included Software, refer to the following files in the BundledSoftware folder in

the Included Setup CD-ROM LICENSE folder.

This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant

video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or

(2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or

implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.

Trademarks

• Canon and the Canon logo are registered trademarks of Canon Inc.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, Windows Server, Windows Media and ActiveX are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Windows is legally recognized as the Microsoft Windows Operating System.

• This product comes with exFAT, a licensed file system technology from Microsoft.

• SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC and microSDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

•ONVIF

is a trademark of Onvif, Inc.

• All other company or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective

holders.

Open Source Software

The product (camera and included RM-Lite) contains Open Source Software modules. For details, please refer to

“ThirdPartySoftware-E.pdf” in the OpenSourceSoftware folder in the LICENSE folder on the Setup CD-ROM. Each module’s

license conditions are also available in the same folder.

R13

R12

Software Type File Name

Camera Management Tool VBTools-E.txt

Recorded Video Utility

Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite RM-Lite-E.txt

Software under GPL and LGPL

If you would like to obtain the source code under GPL/LGPL, please contact us at nvsossg@canon.co.jp and provide the

following information in English or Japanese:

1. Product name and firmware version.

2. Name of the software module or modules you would like to obtain.

You can obtain the source code for at least three years from the day you purchased this product. Please note we may bill

you for any costs we incur in providing you the source code.

Security Export Control

This product is subject to security export control. Therefore, to export or carry it overseas may require an authorization by

governmental agencies.

Types of User Manuals

The following describes the different camera user manuals.

Notes

1. Any unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.

2. The contents of this guide are subject to change without any prior notice.

3. This document has been prepared with the utmost attention to accuracy. If you have any comments, however,

please contact a Canon sales representative.

4. Canon shall assume no liability for any outcome of using this product, notwithstanding items 2 and 3 above.

How to Use This Operation Guide

The assumed reading format of this operation guide is on a computer screen.

Software Screenshots

The software screenshots samples shown in this guide are for illustration only. The screenshots may differ from the

actual screens displayed.

Descriptions use Windows 8.1 for the operating system, Internet Explorer 11 for the web browser, and the VB-M50B

for sample screens.

The video size set selected for explanations is [1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180]. If using a different video size set,

substitute those sizes.

User Manuals

Included User Manuals

Installation Guide

This describes precautions and procedures for installing the camera. Sections you should reference in this guide will be

marked “Installation Guide”.

Guides Included on the Setup CD-ROM

Operation Guide (This Guide)

This explains the camera initial settings, camera angle settings, camera viewer operations, settings on the Setting Page,

and troubleshooting, etc.

Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide

This explains details on how to use the Mobile Camera Viewer.

Appendix – Specifications

This lists the camera specifications.

Camera Management Tool User Manual

This explains details on how to use the Camera Management Tool.

Recorded Video Utility User Manual

This explains details on how to use the Recorded Video Utility.

Network Video Recording Software RM Series Administrator Manual

This explains details on how to use the RM-Lite video recording software (P. 22).

Symbols Indicating Camera Models

Symbols Indicating Camera Models

Explanations that differ depending on the camera model are indicated by the camera name and the following

symbols.

Symbols Indicating Safety Precautions

This section explains the symbols used in this guide. The following symbols used in this guide indicate information for

safe use of the product, as well as important and supplemental information the user should know. Be sure to read and

understand this information when using the product.

Symbol Camera Model

VB-R13VE, VB-R13

VB-R12VE

VB-M50B

VB-H652LVE

VB-H651V

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

Symbol Meaning

Warning Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in death or serious

injury. Be sure to follow these warnings to ensure safety.

Caution Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in injury. Be sure to

follow these precautions to ensure safety.

Caution Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in property damage.

Be sure to follow these precautions.

Important Cautions and restrictions during operation. Make sure to read these carefully.

Note Supplementary descriptions and reference information.

This section explains precautions that must be followed when using the camera.

If they are not followed, injury, death and/or property damage may occur. Read the following information carefully and be

sure to follow the precautions.

Important Warnings

Safety Precautions

Caution

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The AC adapter (sold separately) can be connected to the camera from a standard AC power outlet.

Please refer to the user manual to make sure that the camera is compatible with the adapter.

• The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible.

• Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning or maintaining.

FDA regulation

This Network Camera has not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for use as a medical

device. When incorporated into a system with medical applications, FDA regulations may apply. Therefore, please

consult your legal advisor to determine whether FDA regulations apply.

Precautions

Camera Precautions

FCC NOTICE

Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R13VE, VB-R12VE, VB-H652LVE

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is

operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the user manual, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which

case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such

changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

European Union regulatory notices:

Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R13VE, VB-R12VE, VB-H652LVE

Warning

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the

user may be required to take adequate measures.

FCC NOTICE

Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R13, VB-M50B, VB-H651V

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in

a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off

and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such

changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A., Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)

Warning

If you discover defective conditions such as smoke, strange sounds, heat or strange odors, immediately stop using

the camera and contact your nearest dealer.

Fire or electric shock may result from continued use.

Precautions When Using [Camera] > [Camera Angle] on the Setting Page

Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Included Software

Failure to do the following may result in fire or electric shock.

• If thunder starts, stop installation or inspection etc. and do not touch the camera or continue connecting the cable.

• Do not disassemble or modify the camera.

• Do not spray the camera with water, or otherwise make it wet. (VB-R13/VB-M50B/VB-H651V)

• Please do not insert objects like water or metal objects within the camera housing.

• Do not use flammable sprays near the camera.

• Do not leave LAN cables, external power supplies or AC adapter (sold separately) power connectors connected

when the camera is not in use for long periods.

• Do not damage the connecting cable.

This camera should not be used with medical devices or other life-support systems.

Depending on the computer and network environment, high-precision video transmission cannot be guaranteed due

to video lag or loss.

Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of the camera under the conditions

above.

Warning

Caution

Avoid looking directly at the infrared illumination at close distance for long periods of time.

Intense infrared illumination can cause eye damage.

Caution

Failure to do the following may result in camera malfunction.

• Do not capture the sun, halogen lamps, and other very bright light sources or subjects.

• Do not expose the camera to strong impact or vibration.

• Do not touch the head or lens of the camera.

• Do not forcibly turn the rotating parts of the camera by hand.

H652

R13

R12

M50

H651

Caution

[Camera] > [Camera Angle] (P. 45) on the Setting Page is expected for use only when installing the camera. Do not

use on a daily basis.

Frequent use may result in camera malfunction.

Caution

Do not use the following built-in camera functions or included software in situations requiring high reliability:

– Intelligent Function

– Image Stabilization Function

– Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite

These do not guarantee high-precision capture and cannot support applications beyond their intended range of use.

Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from the use of these functions or software.

Maintenance Precautions

Cleaning the Camera

Turn off the power before cleaning the camera.

Cleaning the Exterior

1 Dampen a soft cloth with water or diluted neutral detergent and gently wipe away any grime.

2 Wipe with a dry cloth.

Cleaning the Lens

Use a commercial lens cleaner to remove grime on the lens surface.

• Scratches on the lens surface may result in poor video capture.

• Auto focus functionality may be degraded if the lens surface is dusty or dirty.

Camera Disposal

Dispose of the camera in accordance with local laws and regulations.

Be sure to remove the memory card from the camera before the disposal.

Warning

Do not use flammable solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner or benzine when cleaning the camera.

Use of these may result in fire or electric shock.

Caution

Periodically inspect the parts and screws for rust and loosening.

For inspections, please contact the dealer where you purchased the product.

Failure to follow these precautions could result in injuries and equipment damage due to falling items.

Important

Grime on the dome cover may result in focusing problems and/or reduction of image quality. It is recommended that the cover be

cleaned on a regular basis.

Table of Contents

Introduction...................................................................................................................... 2

Precautions for Use (Disclaimer) ............................................................................................ 2

License Agreement for Included Software ............................................................................. 3

Trademarks ............................................................................................................................. 3

Open Source Software............................................................................................................3

Security Export Control ........................................................................................................... 4

User Manuals................................................................................................................... 5

Types of User Manuals ...........................................................................................................5

How to Use This Operation Guide .......................................................................................... 5

Symbols Indicating Camera Models....................................................................................... 6

Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 7

Precautions ............................................................................................................................. 8

Cleaning the Camera ............................................................................................................ 10

Camera Disposal .................................................................................................................. 10

Chapter 1 Before Use

Functions of the Network Camera ................................................................................. 20

Camera Software ........................................................................................................... 21

Camera Operations and Settings ......................................................................................... 21

Software Included on the Setup CD-ROM ............................................................................ 21

Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)................................................................... 22

Operating Environment.................................................................................................. 24

The Viewer and Setting Page................................................................................................ 24

Verified Mobile Devices (Setting Page, Viewer)

– As of February 2016 ...................................................................................................... 25

Steps for Setting Up the Camera................................................................................... 26

Step 1 Preparing to Install the camera ................................................................................. 26

Step 2 Checking the Camera Connection ............................................................................ 26

Step 3 Installing the Camera................................................................................................. 26

Step 4 Setting the Camera Angle ......................................................................................... 26

Step 5 Using the Camera Viewers ........................................................................................ 27

Step 6 Adjusting Advanced Settings According to its Use .................................................. 27

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 27

Chapter 2 Camera Setup

Installing Software ......................................................................................................... 30

Necessary Software..............................................................................................................30

Software Installation.............................................................................................................. 30

Checking/Configuring Security Settings........................................................................ 33

Checking Firewall Settings.................................................................................................... 33

Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site................................................................ 34

Settings When Using Windows Server.................................................................................. 35

Configuring Initial Camera Settings............................................................................... 38

Launching the Camera Management Tool ........................................................................... 38

Searching for Cameras ......................................................................................................... 38

Setting up Networks.............................................................................................................. 40

Adding the Camera’s IP Address to Trusted Sites ............................................................... 41

Checking the Video............................................................................................................... 41

Accessing the Camera from Web Browser........................................................................... 42

Chapter 3 Setting the Camera Angle

Flow for the Setting of the Camera Angle...................................................................... 46

Step 1 Configuring the Camera Before Setting the Camera Angle ...................................... 46

Step 2 Setting the Camera Angle and Focus ....................................................................... 46

Setting the Camera Angle ............................................................................................. 47

Camera Angle Screen Composition ..................................................................................... 47

Setting the Camera Angle and Zoom ................................................................................... 48

Setting the Focus .................................................................................................................. 49

Chapter 4 Camera Viewer

Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer ......................................................................... 52

Launching the Camera Viewer.............................................................................................. 52

Switching to the Administrator or an Authorized User .......................................................... 54

Camera Viewer Screen ......................................................................................................... 57

Checking Information............................................................................................................62

Changing the Reception Video Size and View Screen Size.......................................... 63

Changing the Reception Video Size/Format and Display Screen Size ................................ 63

Displaying in Full Screen Mode ............................................................................................ 64

Operating the Camera................................................................................................... 67

Obtaining Camera Control Privileges ................................................................................... 67

Using Pan/Tilt/Zoom.............................................................................................................. 68

Adjusting Video..................................................................................................................... 72

Using Backlight Compensation ............................................................................................ 73

Using Presets or the Home Position ..................................................................................... 74

Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ........................................................................................... 75

Magnifying and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ) ............................................................. 75

Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ) ..................................................... 76

Saving Snapshots.......................................................................................................... 79

Recording Video to a Memory Card.............................................................................. 80

Recording Videos Manually .................................................................................................. 80

Confirming Recorded Video ................................................................................................. 81

Receiving/Transmitting Audio........................................................................................ 82

Receiving Audio.................................................................................................................... 82

Transmitting Audio ................................................................................................................ 82

Checking the Status of Event Detection ........................................................................ 84

Operating External Device Output........................................................................................ 84

Checking the Status of Event Detection ............................................................................... 84

Chapter 5 Setting Page

How to Use The Setting Page........................................................................................ 88

Accessing the Setting Page.................................................................................................. 88

Common Setting Page Operations ....................................................................................... 89

Operating the Video Display Area ........................................................................................ 90

About Each Setting Page...................................................................................................... 92

Video Output......................................................................................................................... 95

[Basic] > [Network]

Configuring Network Settings .................................................................................. 96

LAN ....................................................................................................................................... 96

IPv4 ....................................................................................................................................... 96

IPv6 ....................................................................................................................................... 97

DNS....................................................................................................................................... 98

mDNS.................................................................................................................................... 99

[Basic] > [User Management]

Configuring Accounts and Privileges..................................................................... 100

Administrator Account ........................................................................................................ 100

Authorized User Account.................................................................................................... 100

User Authority ..................................................................................................................... 101

[Basic] > [Date and Time]

Setting the Date/Time............................................................................................. 102

Current Date and Time........................................................................................................ 102

Setting ................................................................................................................................. 102

[Basic] > [Video]

Setting Video Size and Quality............................................................................... 104

All Videos ............................................................................................................................ 104

JPEG ................................................................................................................................... 105

H.264(1) .............................................................................................................................. 105

H.264(2) .............................................................................................................................. 106

[Basic] > [Viewer]

Configuring the Viewer........................................................................................... 107

General ............................................................................................................................... 107

Viewer Settings ................................................................................................................... 107

[Camera] > [Camera]

Setting General Camera Controls .......................................................................... 108

Camera Name.....................................................................................................................108

Camera Control................................................................................................................... 108

Day/Night (When Auto Is Set) ............................................................................................. 110

Installation Conditions.........................................................................................................111

Camera Position Control ..................................................................................................... 111

External Input Device 1, 2................................................................................................... 111

External Output Device 1, 2................................................................................................ 111

[Camera] > [Initial Setting]

Setting Initial Video Settings................................................................................... 112

Camera Position.................................................................................................................. 112

Camera Settings .................................................................................................................113

[Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus]

Day/Night Mode Focus .......................................................................................... 120

Day/Night Mode Focus ....................................................................................................... 120

Camera Control................................................................................................................... 121

[Camera] > [Panorama]

Creating a Panorama Image .................................................................................. 123

Creating a Panorama Image............................................................................................... 123

Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File/Opening the Image File ............................ 125

Capture Settings ................................................................................................................. 126

[Camera] > [Restrict View]

Setting View Restriction.......................................................................................... 127

Configuring View Restrictions ............................................................................................. 128

[Camera] > [Preset]

Registering Presets ................................................................................................ 131

Registering a Preset............................................................................................................131

[Camera] > [Preset Tour]

Setting the Preset Tour Route ................................................................................ 134

Screen Composition............................................................................................................ 134

Tour Route Settings.............................................................................................................136

[Video and Audio] > [ADSR]

Reducing Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific Areas ........................ 139

Specified Area .................................................................................................................... 139

ADSR................................................................................................................................... 140

[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]

Displaying Date, Time and Text on the Viewer ...................................................... 141

On-Screen Display.............................................................................................................. 141

[Video and Audio] > [Privacy Mask]

Setting Privacy Mask.............................................................................................. 143

Registering Privacy Masks.................................................................................................. 143

Changing/Deleting a Privacy Mask..................................................................................... 145

[Video and Audio] > [Audio]

Setting Audio Input/Output..................................................................................... 147

General Sound .................................................................................................................... 147

Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3.................................................................................................... 148

[Server] > [Server]

HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings................................................................... 149

HTTP Server........................................................................................................................ 149

SNMP Server....................................................................................................................... 149

SNMP v1 and v2c Server.................................................................................................... 150

SNMP v3 Server ..................................................................................................................150

FTP Server........................................................................................................................... 150

WS-Security......................................................................................................................... 151

[Server] > [Video Server]

Video Transmission Settings .................................................................................. 152

Video Server........................................................................................................................ 152

[Server] > [Audio Server]

Audio Transmission/Reception Settings ................................................................ 153

Audio Server ....................................................................................................................... 153

[Server] > [RTP Server]

RTP Settings........................................................................................................... 154

RTP Server .......................................................................................................................... 154

Audio Multicast ................................................................................................................... 154

RTP Streaming 1 to 5 .......................................................................................................... 155

[Video Record] > [Upload]

HTTP and FTP Upload Settings ............................................................................. 156

Video Record Setting.......................................................................................................... 156

General Upload................................................................................................................... 156

HTTP Upload....................................................................................................................... 157

FTP Upload ......................................................................................................................... 158

[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]

Setting E-mail Notification ...................................................................................... 160

E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................... 160

[Event] > [External Device]

External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings ............................................. 161

External Device Output 1, 2................................................................................................ 161

External Device Input.......................................................................................................... 162

External Device Input 1, 2................................................................................................... 162

[Event] > [Audio Detection]

Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings ............................................ 164

Volume Detection................................................................................................................164

Scream Detection ............................................................................................................... 165

[Event] > [Timer]

Timer Triggered Operation Settings....................................................................... 167

Timer 1 to 4 ......................................................................................................................... 167

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Overview -............................................................................................................ 169

Intelligent Function.............................................................................................................. 169

Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations ...................................................... 172

Registering Presets.............................................................................................................173

Selecting the Intelligent Function Operation Mode............................................................. 173

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Video Detection - ................................................................................................ 175

Steps for Configuring Video Detection ............................................................................... 175

Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab) ................................................... 179

Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)......................................................... 189

Checking Event Status........................................................................................................ 189

Displaying Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Non-Detection Area and Detection

Results (Display Options)............................................................................................... 190

Reducing Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings) .............................................. 190

Context Menu...................................................................................................................... 191

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Auto Tracking - .................................................................................................... 192

Setting Auto Tracking.......................................................................................................... 192

Auto Tracking Termination.................................................................................................. 195

Disabling Auto Tracking...................................................................................................... 195

Displaying Settings for Detection Areas and Detection Results (Display Options)............ 196

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Shared Operations -............................................................................................. 197

Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)......................................................... 197

Restarting Intelligent Function ............................................................................................ 198

[Event] > [Switch Day/Night]

Executing Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode ............................................ 199

Day/Night Mode Switching ................................................................................................. 199

[Event] > [Linked Event]

Using Event Combinations..................................................................................... 200

Linked Event 1 to 4 .............................................................................................................200

Linked Event Operation Examples...................................................................................... 202

[Security] > [Host Restrictions]

Setting Access Restrictions ................................................................................... 204

IPv4 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 204

IPv6 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 205

[Security] > [SSL/TLS]

Setting HTTP Communication Encryption .............................................................. 206

Certificates .......................................................................................................................... 206

Certificate Management...................................................................................................... 207

Encrypted Communications................................................................................................ 207

[Security] > [802.1X]

Network Port Authentication Settings..................................................................... 209

802.1X Authentication ......................................................................................................... 209

Authentication Method ........................................................................................................ 209

[Security] > [IPsec]

Setting IPsec .......................................................................................................... 211

IPsec ................................................................................................................................... 211

Auto Key Exchange Settings .............................................................................................. 211

IPsec Set 1 to 5 ................................................................................................................... 212

[Memory Card]

Memory Card Operations and Information Display ............................................... 215

Video Record Setting.......................................................................................................... 215

Memory Card Operations ................................................................................................... 215

Memory Card Information ................................................................................................... 217

[Maintenance] > [General]

Displaying Camera Device Information and Perform Maintenance....................... 218

Device Information..............................................................................................................218

Tool ..................................................................................................................................... 218

Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 218

[Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore]

Saving/Restoring Camera Settings ........................................................................ 220

Backup / Restore ................................................................................................................220

[Maintenance] > [Update Firmware]

Updating the Camera Firmware............................................................................. 221

Device Information..............................................................................................................221

Updating Firmware ............................................................................................................. 221

[Maintenance] > [Log]

Checking/Sending Camera Log Information.......................................................... 222

View Logs............................................................................................................................ 222

Log Notifications ................................................................................................................. 222

Chapter 6 Appendix

Modifiers ...................................................................................................................... 226

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 228

List of Log Messages .................................................................................................. 230

Log Messages on the Camera............................................................................................ 230

Error Log ............................................................................................................................. 230

Warning log......................................................................................................................... 235

Notification log .................................................................................................................... 239

List of Viewer Messages.............................................................................................. 243

Messages Displayed in the Information Display................................................................. 243

Restoring Factory Default Settings .............................................................................. 245

Restoring the Initial Settings from a Web Browser.............................................................. 245

Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera ......................... 245

List of Factory Default Settings.................................................................................... 248

Index............................................................................................................................ 259

Chapter

Before Use

This chapter explains the camera functions, software and operating environment.

It also describes the flow from preparation and setup through to actual use.

A network camera not only enables you to operate the camera, but also allows you to record and upload the video, and

perform monitoring using the various intelligent functions of the camera.

However, the functions that can be used differ depending on the model. For the difference in functions by model, please

refer to the table below.

Table of Function Compatibility by Model

The functions for which availability differs depending on the model are shown below.

* In this guide, “memory card” refers to the memory cards that can be used by the cameras.

Functions of the Network Camera

Uploading

video

Recording to

memory card

Operation and setup by

administrator

Operation by guest users

Monitoring by

intelligent functions

Inputting/outputting

audio

Using external devices

Monitoring by guards, etc.

Pan/Tilt   --

Digital PTZ - - 

Audio I/O Terminals -

External Device Terminals -

Full resolution 1920 x 1080 1280 x 960 1920 x 1080

Infrared Illumination - - - -

Camera Angle Setting - - - - 

Audio Detection -

Auto Tracking  ---

Event triggered preset movement   --

Linked Event -

Panorama Creation   --

View Restriction Setting   --

Enhanced Digital Zoom   --

Clear IR Mode - - --

Rotate Video Display - - - 

microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC memory cards supported* - - - 

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards supported*   --

Maximum number of registered presets 257 65 21

R13

R12 M50

H652 H651

Before Use

The following software is available for efficiently configuring and operating the camera.

Camera Operations and Settings

Camera operations are performed using the Camera Viewer/Mobile Camera Viewer.

Camera settings are specified from the Setting Page.

Camera Viewer (P. 51) /Mobile Camera Viewer

Controls the camera, and monitors video and various events.

You can use the Camera Viewer (mainly for computers) and the Mobile Camera Viewer (mainly for devices with a

screen size of 7 inches or less).

The functions available in the Viewer differ according to the user authority (P. 55).

Note

For details on using Mobile Camera Viewer, please refer to “Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide”.

Setting Page (P. 87)

The Setting Page is for the administrator to configure and manage the camera.

Software Included on the Setup CD-ROM

To use the software on the included setup CD-ROM, install the software on the computer.

Note

.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (when using Internet Explorer 9) or .NET Framework 4.5 (when using Internet Explorer 10/11) is necessary to use

Camera Management Tool and Recorded Video Utility.

If it is not installed on the computer, it will be automatically installed when using the installer (P. 30).

Camera Management Tool (P. 38)

This tool is used for batch managing multiple cameras, from initial settings to performing maintenance. The Camera

Management Tool can perform the following tasks.

• Detecting cameras

• Set various camera settings.

• Display the Viewer and the Setting Page.

• Update firmware, back up/restore settings, perform memory card and other operations, as well as camera

maintenance.

This guide explains how to use this tool to configure the initial settings for cameras (P. 38). For details on other uses

and functions, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

The Camera Management Tool can be installed by the installer application.

Installer location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > VBToolsInstall.exe

Recorded Video Utility

This utility is used for viewing and managing the videos recorded on the memory card mounted in the camera. The

Recorded Video Utility enables you to perform the following operations on recorded videos.

• Displaying a list of videos

• Playing and deleting videos

Camera Software

• Downloading videos to a computer

For details on using the utility and its functions, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.

The Recorded Video Utility can be installed from the installer.

Installer location: Setup CD-ROM > the [Applications] folder > VBToolsInstall.exe

RM-Lite

This software displays, records and plays back video from up to four cameras via a network.

Software location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > RMLiteInstall.exe

RM-Lite Software

Note

For details on the usage, operating environment, and functions of RM-Lite, please refer to “System Administrator Manual”.

Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)

You can purchase additional software and licenses as necessary.

Canon H.264 Additional User License AUL-VB

Additional license for viewing H.264 video with multiple computers via the Viewer or Recorded Video Utility.

Each camera includes one license. Additional licenses are necessary for multiple computers to view H.264 video

from a single camera.

Type Overview

RM-Lite Storage Server Up to four cameras can be registered to record video (JPEG).

RM-Lite Viewer

Plays video recorded in the storage server and displays live video (JPEG/H.264) from

the camera.

Up to four cameras can be registered for the viewer.

RM-Lite Manager Use to register cameras and configure recording schedules.

RM-Lite Viewer RM-Lite Storage Server

Network

Flow of video from the camera

Flow of recorded video

Important

To add the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager, you must purchase RM-Lite-V (sold separately).

Before Use

RM-64/RM-25/RM-9

This software allows network cameras to be used for multipoint surveillance, and for displaying, recording and

playing back videos from the camera.

The number of cameras that can be registered with RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 varies: 64, 25, or 9 cameras respectively can

be registered. By using multiple Storage Servers, you can construct a surveillance system supporting up to 512

cameras.

Note

Licenses for upgrading from RM-9 to RM-25 or RM-64, and from RM-25 to RM-64 are also available.

RM-V

This additional license lets you install the RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 RM Manager and RM Viewer on multiple computers.

Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.

RM-Lite-V

This additional license lets you install the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager on multiple computers.

Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.

For the latest information on this product (firmware and included software, user manual, operating environment, etc.),

please refer to the Canon website.

The Viewer and Setting Page

Operating Environment

CPU (Recommended) Intel Core i7-2600 or higher

Graphics Board

(Recommended) Not specified

Memory (Recommended) 2 GB or higher

Viewer Display

(Recommended) 1920 x 1080 or higher

Windows Vista Ultimate/Business/Enterprise/Home Premium SP2 32/64-bit

Windows 7 Ultimate/Professional/Enterprise/Home Premium SP1 32/64-bit

Windows 8/Windows 8 Pro/Windows 8 Enterprise 32/64-bit*

Windows 8.1/Windows 8.1 Pro/Windows 8.1 Enterprise 32/64-bit*

Windows 10 Pro/Windows 10 Enterprise/Windows 10 Education/Windows 10 Home 32/64-bit

Windows Server 2008 Standard SP2 32/64-bit

Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit

Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit*

Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit*

* Can not be started from the start screen

Operating System

Language

German/English/Spanish/French/Italian/Russian/Thai/Turkish/Chinese (Simplified) /

Japanese

Compatible Browser

Internet Explorer 9 32-bit

Internet Explorer 10/11

Microsoft Edge*

Chrome 45*

– Must be configured to allows use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage.

– For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled

– Does not support Mobile Camera Viewer

* Does not support playback of Video (H.264) and audio files, reception of audio

Compatible Mobile Devices Surface, iPad, iPhone, Nexus, Galaxy

Before Use

Verified Mobile Devices (Setting Page, Viewer)

– As of February 2016

Note

• For details on the operating environment of the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

• For information on the operating environment of the Recorded Video Utility, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.

Surface 3

OS:

Windows 8.1 Professional/Windows 8.1 Enterprise 64-bit*

Windows 10 Pro/Windows 10 Enterprise/Windows 10 Education/Windows 10 Home 64-bit

* Can not be started from the start screen

Compatible Browser:

Internet Explorer 11

Microsoft Edge*

– Must be configured to allows use of JavaScript, and web storage

– For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled

* Does not support playback of Video (H.264) and audio files, reception of audio

iPad mini 3/iPad mini 4/

iPad Air/iPad Air 2/

iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/

iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus

OS:

iOS 8.4.1

iOS 9.1

iOS 9.2

Compatible Browser:

Safari

– Must be configured to allows use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage

– For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled

– Does not support playback of Video (H.264) and audio files, reception of audio

– Setting Page and Camera Viewer is not supported on the iPhone

Android Devices

Nexus 9, Android 6.0, Chrome 46

Nexus 9, Android 6.0.1, Chrome 46

Galaxy Tab S 8.4, Android 4.4.2, Chrome 46

Galaxy Tab S 10.5, Android 4.4.2, Chrome 46

– Does not support playback of Video (H.264) and audio files, reception of audio

Nexus 6, Android 6.0, Chrome 46

Nexus 6, Android 6.0.1, Chrome 46

Galaxy S6, Android 5.0.2, Chrome 46

– Does not support playback of Video (H.264) and audio files, reception of audio

– Setting Page and Camera Viewer is not supported

M50

H651

R13

R12

H652

M50

H651

R13

R12

H652

M50

H651

R13

R12

H652

Step 1 Preparing to Install the camera

Make preparations to use the camera via a network.

Install the necessary software

 “Installing Software” (P. 30)

Check/configure the computer and web browser security settings

 “Checking/Configuring Security Settings” (P. 33)

Use the Camera Management Tool to configure initial camera settings.

 “Configuring Initial Camera Settings” (P. 38)

Step 2 Checking the Camera Connection

Access the camera with a computer to ensure preparations have been properly

completed.

Accessing the Camera to Check Videos

Accessing the camera from the Camera Management Tool (P. 41)

Entering an IP Address from a web browser to access the camera (P. 52)

Step 3 Installing the Camera

Install the camera to suit the environment it will be used in.

 “Installation Guide”

Step 4 Setting the Camera Angle

Use [Camera] > [Camera Angle] on the Setting Page to set the camera angle

while checking video on the computer screen.

 “Setting the Camera Angle” (P. 45)

Steps for Setting Up the Camera

Camera Management Tool

Camera Viewer

H651

Camera Angle Setting

Before Use

Step 5 Using the Camera Viewers

Operate the camera while viewing the video in the Viewer.

 “Camera Viewer” (P. 51)

Step 6 Adjusting Advanced Settings According to its Use

Advanced settings can be made in the Setting Menu, such as for

camera control and security, according to how the camera will

be used.

 “Setting Page” (P. 87)

Troubleshooting

Please refer to “Appendix” (P. 225), in case of error messages or problems.

Camera Viewer

Setting Page

Chapter

Camera Setup

To prepare the camera for use, install the necessary software on the computer, and configuring the initial

settings for web browser security and the camera.

When initial settings are complete, access the camera and check if video can be viewed.

Use the setup CD-ROM included with the camera to install the necessary software.

Necessary Software

You will need the following software:

• Camera Management Tool (P. 38)

• Recorded Video Utility

• .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 (unnecessary if already installed on computer)

Note

If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 is not installed on the computer, the installer will automatically install the version

appropriate for the version of Internet Explorer used on the computer.

Software Installation

Installation Methods

The software can be installed together using [Easy Installation], or you can select which software to install using

[Custom Installation].

Installing Software

The installation screen is displayed.

Note

If the [User Account Control] screen is displayed, click [Yes] or [Continue].

Installing Software

Insert the setup CD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

Confirm that all other applications have been closed.

Double-click the CD-ROM icon > [Applications] folder > [VBToolsInstall.exe].

Camera Setup

If you select [Easy Installation], confirm the software that will be installed and click [Next].

If you select [Custom Installation], select the software to be installed and click [Next].

The User License Agreement screen is displayed.

Select the installation method.

Confirm or select the software that will be installed.

Installation starts.

The Camera Management Tool icon and Recorded Video Utility icon will be displayed on the desktop.

Read through the user license agreement and click [Yes] if you accept it.

Click [Exit] or [Reboot].

Camera Setup

Camera configuration and operation may be blocked, depending on the security functions of the operating system and web

browser.

Change or check security settings beforehand.

Checking Firewall Settings

To use the Camera Management Tool on computers where Windows Firewall is enabled, you may need to add the Camera

Management Tool as an application allowed to communicate via the firewall.

Note

Even if you do not perform the following steps, you can still add the Camera Management Tool with the [Windows Security Alert] dialog box

that is displayed when you launch the software (P. 38).

Checking/Configuring Security Settings

Click [System and Security] > [Windows Firewall] in [Control Panel].

Click [Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall].

Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site

When the security level for internet sites and intranet sites is set to [High], it is necessary to add the IP address of the

camera to the list of trusted sites.

Note

Set the camera IP address with the Camera Management Tool (P. 40).

Click [Change settings] > [Allow another app].

Select [Camera Management Tool] and click [Add].

Click [Network and Internet] > [Internet Options] in [Control Panel].

Click the [Security] tab.

Camera Setup

The [Trusted sites] dialog box is displayed.

Note

• Clear the [Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone] checkbox if it is selected.

The camera’s IP address will be added to the [Websites] list.

• You can add IP addresses for multiple cameras by using a wildcard (*) when entering the IP address.

For example, if you enter “192.160.1.*”, all cameras that share the “192.160.1” portion of the address will be added as trusted

sites.

Settings When Using Windows Server

Adding “about:internet” and the Camera Host Name

The Viewer and the Setting Page will not launch when IE ESC (Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration) is

enabled in Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012.

Before using the tools, add “about:internet” and the host name for the connected camera in the Internet Explorer

“local intranet” or “trusted sites” list.

Click [Trusted sites] > [Sites].

Enter the IP address of the camera under [Add this website to the zone], then click [Add].

Security Settings When Using an SSL/TLS Connection

When an SSL/TLS connection to the camera is made from a web browser (Internet Explorer 9/10/11) in Windows

Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the following operations may cause the blocked content dialog box to display,

and prevent further operation.

• The launching of the Viewer and the Setting Page

• Audio reception from the Viewer

This occurs when Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (IE ESC) is enabled in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.

Use the procedures below to change this setting.

Sound Settings for Using the Audio Functions

In Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the sound function is disabled by default.

To use audio functions with the viewer, follow the steps below to enable the sound function.

Important

When “about:internet” is added, the security level in Windows 7 is the same as when using Internet Explorer. After using the

Viewer and the Setting Page, it is recommended that you remove “about:internet” and the camera host name as necessary and

restore the original security level.

Click [Network and Internet] > [Internet Options] in [Control Panel].

Click the [Advanced] tab.

Clear the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk] checkbox in [Security].

Important

Note that when Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration is turned back on, the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk]

checkbox also becomes enabled.

R13

M50

H652

H651

Open [Control Panel] and click [Hardware].

Camera Setup

The [Audio Service Not Running] dialog box is displayed.

The [Sound] dialog box is displayed.

If no audio device is installed, refer to your computer manual.

Click [Sound].

Click [Yes].

Click the [Playback] tab to confirm that an audio device has been installed.

To use a camera, it is necessary to first set the administrator account for the camera, then configure the network settings,

and then connect the camera and computer via the network. Use the Camera Management Tool to configure these settings.

This section describes the procedure for configuring the initial settings for a camera with the factory default settings, such

as the administrator account and the network settings using the Camera Management Tool.

Note

For details on using the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

Launching the Camera Management Tool

Launch the Camera Management Tool that was installed onto the computer from the setup CD-ROM.

The Camera Management Tool launches and the main screen is displayed.

Searching for Cameras

Search for cameras connected to the same network as the computer in which the Camera Management Tool is installed,

and add them to the camera list.

Note

Cameras with the factory default settings are configured to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server. Detect the camera using a DHCP

environment or an IPv6 environment.

Configuring Initial Camera Settings

Connect the camera and computer to the same network and turn on the power.

Double-click the [Camera Management Tool] icon on the desktop.

Camera Setup

The [Search Cameras] dialog box is displayed.

Detected cameras will be displayed in the camera list.

When a dialog indicating that a camera requiring an administrator to be registered has been found, click [OK].

Registering the Administrator Account

The [Register Administrator Account] dialog box is displayed.

Click the [Search Cameras] icon.

Click [Search].

Select a camera in the camera list and click the [Camera Settings] > [Register Administrator Account].

Alternatively, double-click [Admin Required] for [Connection Status].

(1) [Administrator Name]

Enter the administrator name using only alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and underscores.

(2) [Administrator Password]

Enter the Administrator Password.

(3) [Confirm Administrator Password]

Enter the administrator password again for confirmation.

A dialog confirming whether you want to reboot the camera is displayed.

Click [OK] to reboot the camera.

[Connection Status] will change to [Connectable] after the camera is rebooted.

Setting up Networks

Configure the network settings of the camera.

Select the camera in the camera list, click [Network] in [Camera Settings] > [Basic Camera Settings], and configure the

settings.

The Camera Management Tool also enables you to select multiple cameras from the camera list to configure.

Set the Administrator Name and Administrator Password.

Click [OK].

(1)

(2)

(3)

Camera Setup

Adding the Camera’s IP Address to Trusted Sites

When the security level for internet sites and intranet sites is set to [High] in Internet Explorer, it is necessary to add the IP

address of the camera to the list of trusted sites.

A confirmation message is displayed.

The camera will be added as a trusted site for Internet Explorer.

Note

The added information will be loaded when Internet Explorer is restarted. Close and restart Internet Explorer if it is running.

Checking the Video

After configuring the initial settings of the camera, access the camera to check whether video is displayed correctly.

Select a camera from the camera list.

Click the [Maintenance] menu > [Add to Trusted Sites].

Click [Yes].

Launch the Camera Management Tool (P. 38)

Select the camera to open the Viewer in the camera list.

Click [Viewer].

The authentication screen for the Viewer is displayed (P. 53).

The web browser starts and the Camera Viewer is displayed.

Note

The web browser only starts when [Connectable] or [Connectable (error)] is displayed for [Connection Status].

Accessing the Camera from Web Browser

Cameras with the factory default settings are configured to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server. However, you can

access a camera connected to a network environment without a response from the DHCP server by entering a specific IP

address (192.168.100.1).

Enter the administrator name and administrator password (P. 39), and click [OK].

Important

• You can only access a camera 30 seconds after connecting the camera to the network environment without a response from the DHCP

server using the 192.168.100.1 IP address.

• If there is a response from the DHCP server after 30 seconds has elapsed, the camera switches to the address assigned by the DHCP

server.

• When accessing a camera by entering 192.168.100.1 in a web browser, set the computer to an IP address with the same subnet

(255.255.255.0).

• If multiple cameras with the factory default settings exist on the same network, the cameras cannot be accessed.

Camera Setup

The [Initial Settings] top page will be displayed.

After the camera reboots, the Setting Page is displayed and you can configure the settings.

Launch the web browser.

Enter 192.168.100.1, and press the Enter key.

Enter the administrator name and administrator password, and click [Apply].

Chapter

Setting the Camera Angle

After installing the camera, set the camera angle while checking the video displayed in [Camera] > [Camera

Angle] on the Setting Page.

H651

Adjust the camera angle when installing the camera or after changing the installation location.

The camera angle settings are configured by accessing the Setting Page (P. 88).

Step 1 Configuring the Camera Before Setting the Camera Angle

Set the digital zoom, image stabilizer, and image flip, which affect the camera angle.

[Digital Zoom] (P. 108) and [Image Stabilizer] (P. 108) in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] on the Setting Page.

[Image Flip] (P. 111) in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Installation Conditions] on the Setting Page.

Step 2 Setting the Camera Angle and Focus

Sets pan, tilt, zoom, rotation and focus.

[Camera] > [Camera Angle] (P. 47) on the Setting Page.

Flow for the Setting of the Camera Angle

Important

[Camera] > [Camera Angle] on the Setting Page is for camera installation adjustment and is not intended for regular use. It may damage

the camera if used frequently.

Setting the Camera Angle

Select [Camera] > [Camera Angle] on the Setting Page to set pan, tilt, zoom, rotation and focus.

Note

[Camera Angle] can be also launched from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User

Manual”.

Camera Angle Screen Composition

(1) Video Display Area

Camera video is displayed here.

(2) Control Assist Display

Displays the available directions for the camera with dotted lines when performing pan/tilt operations.

(3) [Pan] Buttons

Pan the camera.

(4) [Tilt] Buttons

Tilt the camera.

(5) [Zoom] Buttons

Zoom the camera.

(6) [Rotation] Buttons

Rotate the camera.

(7) [Rotation] Slider

Click on the slider or drag the slider to rotate the camera angle.

(8) [Reconnect] Buttons

Reconnects to the camera. Can be operated when not connected to the camera.

Setting the Camera Angle

Important

• When starting to set the camera angle, the Viewers and recording software connected to the camera are disconnected.

• Connections to a single camera are limited to 30 minutes. Since the camera is automatically disconnected after 30 minutes elapse,

click the [Reconnect] button to reconnect to the camera if you have not finished setting the camera angle.

• Multiple computers cannot simultaneously connect to a single camera, using the [Camera Angle] tool.

(3)

(7)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(14)(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(9)

(15)

(8)

(10)

(13)

(12)

(11)

(9) Control Assist Correction

If you click [Exec] when the control assistance display does not match the actual camera angle, an operation is

performed which confirms the actual camera angle, and the position of the control assistance display is

automatically corrected.

Correction takes approximately one minute.

(10) [Camera Settings]

Operate the focus.

(11) Digital Zoom Range

Displayed when [Digital Zoom] is set to [Enable] in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] on the Setting

Page.

(12) [Zoom] Slider

Click on the slider or drag the slider to zoom the camera.

(13) [Control Assist Display] Buttons

Switch whether to display control assist in the video display area.

(14) [Apply]

Click [Apply] to apply the changed settings.

(15) [Clear]

Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.

Setting the Camera Angle and Zoom

You can set the camera angle and zoom using the video display area or buttons.

Configuring the Settings with the Operation Buttons and Sliders

Set the angle and zoom using the [Pan], [Tilt], [Zoom], and [Rotation] buttons.

These buttons operate while pressed and stop when released.

To operate with the [Zoom] slider, drag the slider to change the camera zoom ratio according to the position on the

slider.

If you set [Digital Zoom] to [Enable] in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] on the Setting Page, the digital zoom

area (yellow) is displayed and digital zoom becomes available.

The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality becomes.

Important

If you change the camera angle after configuring the intelligent function, privacy mask, preset, and ADSR, those settings must be

configured again.

Pans left or right.

Tilts up or down.

Operate the zoom ratio (telephoto/wide-angle).

Setting the Camera Angle

To operate the camera angle using the [Rotation] slider, click the slider or drag the tab to adjust the camera to an

angle where the subject in the video is horizontal.

Setting Camera Angle by Clicking Video

If you click anywhere in the video display area, the camera angle will change to center on that location.

If you click outside the pan or tilt range, however, the camera angle will only change for the one which is within its

range.

Note

If the camera moves differently than the intended operation, or if settings in the full range displayed by control assist cannot be

made, control assist may be out of alignment with the actual camera angle. In this case, click [Exec] for [Control Assist Correction],

and set the camera angle again.

Setting the Focus

You can automatically or manually focus on the subject, or fix the focus at infinity. When manually operating the focus, you

can use the One-shot AF feature to focus on the subject.

For precautions, etc. regarding the focus, please refer to the “Important” and “Note” sections of [Camera] > [Initial Setting]

> [Camera Settings] > [Focus] on the Setting Page (P. 114).

Controls the rotation.

Digital Zoom Range

[Focus]

Selects the focus.

[Auto]

Automatically adjusts the focus.

[Manual]

You can click and hold the [Near] and [Far] buttons in [Adjust Focus] to adjust the focus in the near and far directions.

When you click [Exec] in [One-shot AF], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual mode.

[Fixed at infinity]

You can set the focus so that it is fixed near infinity.

Note

If you click [Apply] to apply changed camera angle settings, the zoom and focus settings are also reflected in [Initial Setting].

Chapter

Camera Viewer

Use the web browser to access the Viewer in the camera to perform camera operations, view live video, and

check the status of events.

You can start the Camera Viewer to switch users and check/configure the status of the camera as well as the video display.

Note

If you open another window or tab to access the camera while an authenticated web page is displayed, the authentication information of

the displayed web page may be discarded.

In this case, enter the authentication information again.

Launching the Camera Viewer

You can enter the IP address set with the Camera Management Tool (P. 40) directly into a web browser to display the

Setting Page of the camera, and start the Viewer from the Setting Page.

Note

For details on settings in the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

The authentication screen for Setting Page will be displayed.

The Setting Menu is displayed.

Note

You can set [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] to [Display Viewer] in the setting menu to set the Viewer as the default

page (P. 107).

Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer

Launch the web browser.

Enter the IP address, and press the Enter key.

Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password (P. 39) and click [OK].

Click [Viewer].

Camera Viewer

The authentication screen for the Viewer is displayed.

The Camera Viewer is displayed.

User Authentication

When you use the Viewer and the Setting page, an authentication screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter

a user name and password.

If you enter the wrong user name or password, you will not be able to connect to the camera. Enter the correct user

name and password and connect to the camera.

When [Basic] > [Viewer] > [Viewer Settings] > [User Authentication] on the Setting Page is set to [Do not

authenticate], the authentication screen is not displayed when connecting the Viewer.

The administrator name and administrator password are set using the Camera Management Tool (P. 39).

Enter the administrator name and administrator password (P. 39), and click [OK].

Authentication screen for the Setting Page Authentication screen for the Viewer

Note

• Only administrators can connect to a camera using the Setting Page.

• When IE ESC (Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration) is enabled in Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the

blocked content dialog box may be displayed when attempting to access the Setting Page or the viewer. If this happens, please

Switching to the Administrator or an Authorized User

If [Basic] > [Viewer] > [Viewer Settings] > [User Authentication] is set to [Do not authenticate] on the Setting Page, an

authentication screen is not displayed when connecting to the Viewer, and you can use the Viewer as a guest user. Guest

users cannot perform some operations with the Viewer, but you can also switch the user in order to use the Viewer as an

administrator or authorized user.

The [Main] menu will be displayed.

Important

• Change the administrator password periodically to enhance system security. Do not forget the new password.

• Restore factory default settings if you have forgotten the administrator account (P. 245). However, you will become unable to

connect to the camera because the administrator account is also initialized. Use the Camera Management Tool to configure the

initial settings (P. 38).

• It is strongly recommended that you clear the [Remember my credentials] checkbox when an authorized user shares a Viewer

on the same computer.

Click [Main] button.

Click [Switch Users].

Camera Viewer

The user authentication window is displayed.

The Viewer for the user entered for user authentication is displayed.

Note

In environments without a proxy server, select [Network and Internet] > [Internet options] > the [Connections] tab > [LAN settings],

and clear the [Automatically detect settings] checkbox in [Control Panel].

Camera Viewer Access Restrictions

You can set authorized users, which require user authentication, and guest users, which do not require

authentication.

The functions that each user can use in the Camera Viewer depend on the privileges assigned to the user (P. 101).

Administrator:

The user assigned all privileges.

Access the Viewer using the administrator name and password registered for the administrator account (P. 39).

The administrator can disable all the privileges of an authorized user or a guest user, and completely prohibit

authorized users and guest users from accessing the camera.

Authorized user:

An authorized user has higher privileges than a guest user.

It is necessary to register the user name and password (P. 100).

Guest user:

This user can only use a limited set of functions.

Can access the Viewer without performing user authentication.

The four types of privileges for using the Viewers are privileged camera control, camera control, video distribution

and audio distribution.

The scope of each privilege and whether it can be granted to a user is shown below.

Enter a user name and password and click [OK].

If an item in [Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], or [Video Distribution] is set to [Enable], the items above

and to the right of that item are also set to [Enable]. If an item is set to [Disable], the items below and to the left of that

item are also set to [Disable].

In the rows, more powerful privileges are on the left and less powerful privileges are on the right. However, audio

distribution can be set separately.

In the columns, authorized users have higher privileges than guest users.

Note

• The factory default setting gives privileged camera control to authorized users.

• With the factory default settings, guest users are assigned privileges for camera control, video distribution, and audio distribution.

Privilege Privileged Camera

Control Camera Control Video Distribution Audio Distribution

Scope of Privilege

Can perform the most

operations after the

administrator.

Can perform some

Viewer operations.

View Video with the

Viewer

Receive or Audio with

the Viewer

Grant to Authorized

Users Yes Yes Yes Yes

Grant to Guest Users No Yes Yes Yes

Important

• Multiple computers cannot connect to a single camera at the same time using the same administrator account.

An authorized user or a guest user can connect to the camera from multiple computers at the same time. However, when

controlling the camera, authorized users are given priority of the camera control, and guest users are placed in a queue.

• [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] must be set to [Display Viewer] to enable authorized users and guest users to

connect to the camera.

Camera Viewer

Camera Viewer Screen

The privileges required for operating the Viewer are indicated with the following symbols.

Administrator Privileges

Privileged Camera Control or higher privileges

Camera Control or higher privileges

No Symbol Video Distribution or higher privileges

Audio Distribution privileges

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(7)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)

(24)

(25)

(14)

(12)

(13)

(15)

(1)

(22)

(23)

(16)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(K)

(L)

(M)

(N)

(S)

(T)

(U)

(V)

(W)

(17) (20)(18) (19)

(E)

(F)

(G)

(H)

(I)

(J)

(O)

(P)

(R)

(Q) (X)

(1) Video Display Area

Displays video received from the camera.

(2) [Reconnect] Button

Reconnects to the camera. Can be operated when the Viewer is not connected to the camera.

(3) [Full Screen Mode] Button

Video is displayed in full screen mode (P. 64).

(4) [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] Button

Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area (P. 69).

(5) [BLC] (Back Light Compensation) Button

Turns on/off backlight compensation. This control is effective when the video is dark due to backlight (P. 73).

(6) [Memory Card Recording] Button

Start and stop video recording to a memory card (P. 80).

(7) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button

Obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 67).

(8) [Snapshot] Button

Open the snapshot panel and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button in the control display

area (P. 79).

(9) [Viewer PTZ] Button

Starts/stops the Viewer PTZ. When started, the Viewer PTZ panel is displayed in the control display area (P. 75).

(10) [Digital PTZ] Button

Starts/stops the Digital PTZ. When started, the Digital PTZ panel is displayed in the control display area (P. 76).

(11) [Panorama Display] Button

Displays the panorama display panel in the control display area (P. 71).

(12) [Close] Button

Closes the panels displayed in the control display area.

(13) Snapshot Tab

Click this to switch the control display area to the snapshot panel (P. 79).

(14) Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ Tab

Click this to switch the control display area to the Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ panel (P. 75).

(15) Panorama Display Tab

Click this to switch the control display area to the panorama display panel (P. 71).

(16) Control Display Area

Click (13), (14), or (15) to display the snapshot panel, Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ panel, or panorama display panel.

R13

R12 M50

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12 M50

Camera Viewer

(17) [Main] Menu

Switches the language or user, and switches the Setting Page or Mobile Camera Viewer.

(A) [Language] Button

Switches the display language .

(B) [Switch Users]

Use this to log in as an administrator or authorized user (P. 54).

The screen switches to the Setting Page (P. 88).

(D) [Mobile Camera Viewer]

Switches the connection to the Mobile Camera Viewer. For details on Mobile Camera Viewer, please refer

to “Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide”.

(18) [Video and Audio] Menu

Configures the video display size and audio transmission/reception of the Viewer.

(E) Video Size

Select the video reception size and video format from the camera (P. 63).

(F) H.264 Reception

Selects whether to enable or disable H.264 video reception (P. 63).

(G) Display Size

Select the video display size for the screen (P. 63).

(H) Maximum Frame Rate

Select the maximum frame rate for JPEG video (P. 64).

(I) Audio Reception

Setting to start/stop audio reception and the volume from the camera (P. 82).

(J) Audio Transmission

Setting to start/stop audio transmission, the volume, and transmission time to the camera (P. 82).

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

(H)

(I)

(J)

H651

H652

M50

R13

H651

H652

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

(19) [Camera Operation] Menu

Sets the pan/tilt/zoom, focus, exposure, and day/night switch of the camera.

(K) Pan/Tilt

Operate a button to move the angle in the direction of the arrow (P. 71).

(L) Pan/Tilt Speed

Select the operating speed for the [Pan/Tilt] buttons (P. 71).

(M) Zoom

Operate a button to zoom in and zoom out (P. 71).

(N) Zoom Speed

Select the operation speed for the zoom button (P. 71).

(O) Focus

Sets the camera to focus on the subject (P. 72).

(P) Exposure Compensation

Corrects the exposure according to the brightness of the subject (P. 72).

(Q) Clear IR Mode

Selects whether to enable/disable the clear IR mode that reduces shade and heat shimmer in far

backgrounds (P. 73).

(R) Day/Night

Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment (P. 73).

M50

R12

R13

M50

R12

R13

M50

R12

R13

M50

R12

R13

(K)

(L)

(M)

(N)

(O)

(P)

(R)

(Q)

M50

R13 R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

R13 R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

Camera Viewer

(20) [Event and Input/Output] Menu

Enables you to check the output operations and input status of an external device, the detection status of the

intelligent function and the status of linked events.

(S) External Device Output

Use external device output (P. 84).

(T) External Device Input

Displays the status of the external device input signal for each input source (P. 84).

(U) Intelligent Function (Image Detection)

Displays the status of video detection by the intelligent function for each detection setting number (P. 84).

(V) Intelligent Function (Auto Tracking)

The status of Auto Tracking by the Intelligent Function is displayed (P. 85).

(W) Intelligent Function (Audio Detection)

Displays the status of [Volume Detection] or [Scream Detection] (P. 85).

(X) Linked Events

Displays the status of linked events (P. 85).

(21) Information Display

Information, warning and error messages are displayed (P. 62).

(22) Pan/Tilt Slider

Drag the sliders to pan (horizontally) or tilt (vertically) the camera (P. 68).

(23) Zoom Slider

Turn the knob to operate the zoom in (telephoto)/zoom out (wide-angle) function of the camera (P. 68).

(24) Preset Selection Menu

Selects a preset registered in the camera in advance (P. 74).

(25) [Home Position] Button

Move the camera angle to the home position (P. 74).

(S)

(T)

(U)

(V)

(W)

(X)

H651

H652

M50

R13

H651

H652

M50

R13

H651

H652

M50

R13

H651

H652

M50

R13

R12

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

R12

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

Checking Information

Information, such as the frame rate, camera pan/tilt/zoom values and descriptions of each function, is displayed in the

Information Display.

Warning and error messages will also be displayed here if there are problems with camera operations or systems.

For details on the information displayed, please refer to “List of Viewer Messages” (P. 243).

Important

When [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] (P. 108) is enabled, the actual angle of view of the video will be

smaller than the pan/tilt/zoom values shown in the Information Display.

Information Display

Camera Viewer

You can set the size and format of the video received from the camera and the size of the display screen on the computer.

Changing the Reception Video Size/Format and Display Screen Size

Open the [Video and Audio] menu and configure the video received from the camera.

(1) Video Size

Select the size and format of video received from the camera.

The sizes that can be selected depend on the setting in [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] on the

Setting Page (P. 104).

*1 If you enable [H.264] (make it purple), the H.264 video size is added to the menu.

*2 [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] cannot be set for [Video Size Set] (P. 104).

(2) H.264

Enable this (make it purple) to receive the H.264 video.

If you click this when it is disabled (gray), the [Software Product License Agreement] dialog box is displayed. Click

[Yes] to accept the terms of the license agreement. The decoder is downloaded from the camera, enabling H.264

video reception.

(3) Display Size Setting

The sizes that can be configured depend on the setting in [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] on the

Setting Page (P. 104).

Changing the Reception Video Size and View Screen Size

[Video Size Set] Setting Selectable Video Size

JPEG H.264*

1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270*

480 x 270

960 x 540

1920 x 1080 • The sizes set with [Video Size] in [Basic] > [Video] >

[H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in the Setting Page (P. 105),

determine the sizes displayed in the menu.

• When [H.264(2)] is set to [Enable] in [Basic] > [Video] >

[H.264(2)] in the Setting Page (P. 106), both the [H.264(1)]

and [H.264(2)] video sizes are displayed in the menu.

1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180

320 x 180

640 x 360

1280 x 720

1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240

320 x 240

640 x 480

1280 x 960

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

M50

* [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] cannot be set for [Video Size Set] (P. 104).

(4) Max. Frame Rate (JPEG)

You can select the maximum frame rate for JPEG video.

The setting is not selectable when displaying H.264 video in the video display area.

Displaying in Full Screen Mode

You can display the video display area in full screen mode by clicking the [Full Screen Mode] button in the upper right of

the Viewer.

Menus

When the full screen view is used, the menu panels required for controlling the camera are displayed on the bottom

of the screen, as with the Camera Viewer screen.

The privileges required for operating the menu panel are indicated with the following symbols.

[Video Size Set] Setting Selectable Screen Size Remarks

1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270*

Actual Pixels

480 x 270

960 x 540

1920 x 1080

Fit to Window

[Actual Pixels] displays the video at

the size at which it is being captured.

[Fit to Window] displays the video at

the maximum size possible in the web

browser window.

1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180

Actual Pixels

480 x 270

640 x 360

1280 x 720

Fit to Window

1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240

Actual Pixels

480 x 360

640 x 480

1280 x 960

Fit to Window

M50

Administrator Privileges

Privileged Camera Control or higher privileges

Camera Control or higher privileges

No Symbol Video Distribution or higher privileges

Audio Distribution privileges

Camera Viewer

(1) Menu Area Display Switch Button

Switches between displaying and hiding the menu bar.

(2) [Reconnect] Button

Reconnects to the camera. Can be operated when the Viewer is not connected to the camera.

(3) Full Screen Mode Switch Button

Returns the video display area to the regular view.

(4) [Video and Audio] Menu

Configures the video display size and audio transmission/reception of the Viewer.

(A) Video Size

Sets the reception video size from the camera (P. 63).

(B) H.264

Selects whether to enable/disable H.264 video reception (P. 63).

Selects the maximum frame rate for JPEG video (P. 63).

(D) Audio Reception

Plays/stops the received audio and sets the volume (P. 82).

(E) Audio Transmission

Plays/stops the transmitted audio and sets the volume and audio transmission time (P. 82).

(5) Camera Operation Menu

Performs the basic settings and operations of the camera.

(F) Preset

Selects a preset registered in the camera in advance (P. 74).

(G) Focus

Sets the camera to focus on the subject (P. 72).

(H) Exposure Compensation

Corrects the exposure according to the brightness of the subject (P. 72).

(I) Day/Night

(5)

(2)

(1) (7) (9)(3)

(4) (8)(6)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

(F) (N)

(G)

(O)

(L) (M)(J) (K)(I)(H)

Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment (P. 73).

(J) Clear IR Mode

Selects whether to enable/disable the clear IR mode that reduces shade and heat shimmer in far

backgrounds (P. 73).

(K) Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move

Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area (P. 69).

(L) Pan/Tilt/Zoom

If you enable this button (make it purple), the pan/tilt/zoom sliders are displayed on the screen to perform

operations (P. 70).

The pan slider is displayed on the bottom of the screen, the tilt slider on the left edge of the screen, and the

zoom slider on the right edge of the screen.*

(M) BLC (Back Light Compensation)

Turns on/off backlight compensation (P. 73).

(N) Home Position

Move the camera angle to the home position (P. 74).

(O) Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges

Obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 67).

(6) Event and Input/Output Menu

Use external device output (P. 84).

(7) Snapshot

Displays the still image displayed when the button was clicked by opening the snapshot panel (P. 79).

(8) Memory Card Recording

Start and stop video recording to a memory card (P. 80).

(9) Information Display

Information, warning and error messages are displayed (P. 62).

M50

R13 R12

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

Camera Viewer

This section describes the operations and configuration required for using the camera, such as obtaining camera control

privileges, setting the angle and focus.

Obtaining Camera Control Privileges

To use the camera, you must obtain control privileges with the Viewer.

If you have not yet obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button.

You will obtain control privileges and be able to use the buttons on the Viewer.

The center of the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button turns green while you have control privileges.

Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator

Depending on the camera control privilege status, the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button

appearance changes as follows.

Operating the Camera

Important

It is necessary to obtain the camera control privileges to perform the operations and configuration as first described in this section.

Camera control privileges not obtained

Control privileges obtained

Appearance Control Privilege Status Explanation

Control privileges not obtained Camera control privileges have not been obtained.

Waiting for control privileges When a guest user is waiting to obtain camera control privileges, the

remaining time is counted down.

Control privileges obtained Camera control privileges have been obtained.

Control privileges obtained

(remaining control time)

After a guest user has obtained camera control privileges, the time

that the user can retain control privileges in priority over other guest

users is counted down.

Using Pan/Tilt/Zoom

You can pan, tilt and zoom the camera to set the camera angle.

Note

• Camera operations using clicking and dragging, do not offer a high precision control of the camera.

• The administrator can operate the camera regardless of view restrictions. Authorized and guest users can only operate the camera

within the restricted view.

Clicking on the Video Display Area or Use the Sliders

Moving by Clicking on the Video Display Area

If you click in the video display area, the camera angle will change to center on the mouse pointer location. If the

camera angle does not center on the desired location with a single click, repeat the operation.

Note

Click operations are not available in the video display area while using the Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ.

Moving Using the Sliders

Drag the pan and tilt sliders to pan and tilt the camera.

Drag the zoom slider to zoom the camera.

The slider can also move by clicking directly on the slider bar.

Sliders Used for Digital Zoom and Enhanced Digital Zoom

If you set [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] to [Enable] on the Setting Page (P. 108), the

digital zoom range (orange) will be displayed on the zoom slider and you will be able to use digital zoom.

Important

• Multiple users cannot obtain control privileges simultaneously.

• The Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges button is displayed for authorized users and guest users if [Camera Control] is selected

in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority] on the Setting Page.

• Administrators can take away camera control privileges from authorized users or guest users. Authorized users can also take away

camera control privileges from guest users.

A user with lower privileges cannot obtain camera control privileges while a user with higher privileges has camera control privileges.

Once finished, the administrator should always exit the Viewer or click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button to

release the control privileges.

R13

R12

M50

Zoom Slider

Drag upward to zoom in (telephoto), drag

downward to zoom out (wide-angle).

Tilt Slider

Move the camera vertically.

Pan Slider

Move the camera horizontally.

Camera Viewer

Also, if you set [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Enhanced Digital Zoom] to [Enable] on the Setting Page

(P. 108), the enhanced digital zoom range (blue) is displayed on the zoom slider and enhanced digital zoom

becomes available.

Enhanced digital zoom performs digital zooming within a range where poor image quality is not apparent, according

to the received video size.

Note

• The zoom magnification for enhanced digital zoom is limited to the video size set by the user with camera control privileges.

Since other users also use digital zoom with the same zoom ratio, video deterioration may occur, depending on the received

video size.

• If you perform a zoom in operation that passes the telephoto end of the enhanced digital zoom area when both the digital zoom

area and enhanced digital zoom area exist, the camera temporarily stops at the telephoto end of the enhanced digital zoom area.

• The zoom ratio (digital zoom ratio) is displayed in the information view.

• With digital zoom, image quality is reduced as the zoom ratio increases.

Using Area Zoom/Drag to Move

You can drag on the video display area to zoom in and out, and change the camera angle.

Note

You cannot use Area Zoom or Drag to Move when using Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ.

Using Area Zoom to Zoom In and Out

Drag left-to-right to define an area to zoom in on.

Drag right-to-left to draw out a frame in which will appear a preview of the video display area that will be zoomed

Digital Zoom Range

Enhanced Digital Zoom Maximum Telephoto

(Temporary Stop Position)

Enhanced Digital Zoom Range

Optical Zoom Range

Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter (Area Zoom) mode.

Drag out a frame in the video display area.

out to.

When operating in Area Zoom mode, an icon (zoom in: ; zoom out: ) is displayed in the frame.

To stop Area Zoom, right-click with the left mouse button held down, and the frame is displayed.

When dragged left-to-right, the camera will zoom in until the area in the frame fills the video display area.

When dragged right-to-left, the camera will zoom out, centered around the area in the frame.

Using Drag to Move to Change the Camera Angle

The camera angle will move in the direction of the arrow.

The maximum length of the arrow is half the width and height of the video display area, and movement speed

increases with the length of the area.

Note

When using Drag to Move, the pan/tilt sliders will not move while the cameras moves.

The camera will stop.

Using [Pan/Tilt/Zoom] in the [Camera Control] Menu

Open the [Camera Operation] menu and perform camera pan, tilt, and zoom operations.

Release the mouse button.

Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter (Drag to Move) mode.

In the video display area, drag in the direction you would like to change the camera angle. An arrow will be

displayed.

Release the mouse button.

Camera Viewer

(1) [Pan/Tilt]

The camera angle will move in the direction of each arrow. Movement will continue while you hold the button

down, and stop when you release it.

Click the center button to move the camera angle to the midpoint of the pan/tilt range of motion. However, if a

view restriction is set (P. 128) and the midpoint is outside the restrict view area, the camera angle moves to the

edge of the restrict view area.

(2) Pan/Tilt Speed

Set the operation speed by the [Pan/Tilt] button.

(3) [Zoom]

Click the buttons to zoom in and out. Movement will continue while you hold the button down, and stop when you

release it.

(4) Zoom Speed

Set the operation speed by the [Zoom] button.

Note

Even if you change the pan/tilt speed or zoom speed setting, the speed of pan/tilt/zoom operations on the slider or panorama does

not change.

Operating the Camera with the Panorama Display Panel

You can operate the camera using the frames within the panorama display area.

To display a panorama image in the panorama display panel, you must create the image and save it to the camera

(P. 123).

The [Panorama Display] panel is shown in the control display area.

The frame indicates the area being captured by the current camera.

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

Click the [Panorama Display] button.

Use the frame in the panorama display panel to pan/tilt/zoom the camera.

Move or Zoom by Dragging

Click inside the frame and drag it to pan and tilt the camera.

If you click and drag outside the frame, a new frame will be drawn. The camera will pan/tilt/zoom to capture the

area in the frame.

If you drag an edge of the frame to change its size, the camera will zoom in or out to capture the area in the

frame.

Move by Clicking

If you click outside the frame, the frame will move and center on that point, panning and tilting the camera.

Adjusting Video

Open [Camera Operation] menu to operate focus, exposure, clear IR mode and day/night function.

Focusing

Focus on the subject.

[Auto]

Focusing is performed automatically.

[Manual]

You can click and hold the (Near) and (Far) buttons to adjust the focus in the near and far directions.

[Fixed at infinity]

You can set the focus so that it is fixed near infinity.

Note

• For cautions on using Focus, see the “Important” section on P. 114.

• For information on the range of focus, please refer to the table on P. 114.

Setting the Exposure Compensation

Adjust the brightness of the video.

Move the slider to a negative value to make the video darker or a positive value to make the video lighter.

Frame

Camera Viewer

Setting the Clear IR Mode

If you click the [Clear IR Mode] button to enable it (make it purple), the video becomes black and white, which

reduces shade and heat shimmer in far backgrounds.

Switching Day/Night

Set the shooting mode according to the brightness of the installation environment of the camera.

For details on this function, see [Day/Night] on “Setting Page” (P. 118).

Using Backlight Compensation

Click [BLC] to brighten video that is dark due to backlight.

The back light compensation button becomes active (purple) while backlight compensation is being performed.

Click the button again to cancel backlight compensation.

Note

If bright areas are overexposed, use [Smart Shade Control] on the Setting Page.

Important

• Cannot be set when [Exposure] is set to [Manual] on the Setting Page (P. 115).

• Cannot be set when [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] on the Setting Page (P. 116).

M50

ON Status

ON Status (while camera control privileges are not obtained)

OFF Status

Important

• Day/night can be set by the administrator and authorized users with privileged camera control.

• Day/night cannot be set when the clear IR mode is enabled (purple).

• For cautions on using Day/Night, see the “Important” section on P. 118.

M50

Important

• You cannot use the [BLC] button if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] on the Setting Page.

• You cannot use the [BLC] button if [Exposure] is set to [Manual] on the Setting Page.

Using Presets or the Home Position

It is possible to control the camera using a preset or home position registered to the camera in advance.

When you click the preset selection menu and select a preset from the list that is displayed, the camera will move to the

camera angle of the selected preset.

Clicking the [Home Position] button will move the camera angle to the home position.

Note

The registered preset is displayed in the preset selection menu.

[Home Position] Button

Preset Selection Menu

Camera Viewer

Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ are both functions which allow easy panning, tilting and zooming using the digital zoom.

Magnifying and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ)

You can use the Viewer PTZ to magnify part of a video (using digital zoom) without moving the camera.

This feature does not use the camera’s pan, tilt, or zoom features, making it useful for situations like the use of the intelligent

function, where you do not want to change the camera position.

Note

• You cannot record the video magnified with the Viewer PTZ.

• You can display the magnified video in full screen mode when using the Viewer PTZ.

The [Viewer PTZ] button changes active (purple), and the Viewer PTZ panel is displayed in the control display

area.

Initially, the preview frame (light blue) surrounds the entire video.

The video of the area inside the preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.

Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ

Viewer PTZ Digital PTZ

Enlarges the specified part of the video transmitted from the

camera and then displays it in the viewer.

Transmits only the cropped part of the entire area that can

be captured by the camera.

The size of the received data is large. The size of the received data is small.

Camera control is not required. Camera control is required.

PTZ operation can be performed independently for each

Viewer.

Independent operation cannot be performed by each

Viewer. If multiple Viewers are connected, the same Digital

PTZ display is applied to the other Viewers.

Custom trim size Five levels of trim size

Important

You cannot perform camera operations by clicking/dragging in the video display area while using the Viewer PTZ.

M50

H652 H651

M50

R12R13

Click the [Viewer PTZ] button.

In the Viewer PTZ panel, drag an edge of the preview frame to make it smaller.

Move or Resize by Dragging

Press the mouse button inside the frame and drag it to move the preview frame.

If you press the mouse button and drag outside the frame, a new preview frame will be drawn.

You can resize the preview frame by dragging an edge of the frame.

Move by Clicking

If you click outside the frame, the preview frame will move and center on that point.

Move Using the Sliders

You can use the pan, tilt and zoom sliders in the video display area to move the preview frame.

Note

The Viewer PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the quality of the video.

Exiting Viewer PTZ

The Viewer PTZ exits if you perform one of the following operations.

• Click the Viewer PTZ button to disable it.

• Click the Digital PTZ button to start the Digital PTZ

Note

You can also perform the following operations to retain the zoomed view of the video display area without exiting the Viewer PTZ

while the Viewer PTZ button is active (purple).

– Click the [Close] button on the control display area to close the Viewer PTZ panel

– Click the panorama display tab or snapshot tab to switch the panel in the control display area

Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ)

You can use the Digital PTZ panel to crop and display part of a camera image in the image display area.

Note

If you enable Digital PTZ while receiving H.264 video, the received video is switched to JPEG.

Move the frame to the area you would like to magnify and resize the frame as desired.

Preview Frame

H652 H651

M50

H652

H651

M50

H652

H651

Camera Viewer

Cropping Video With Digital PTZ Panel

The [Digital PTZ] button changes active (purple), and the Digital PTZ panel is shown in the control display area.

The preview frame operations are the same as with the Viewer PTZ (P. 75).

The preview frame size can be set to any of 5 sizes. The screen sizes according to the setting in [Basic] > [Video]

> [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] (P. 104) on the Setting Page.

• When the aspect ratio 16:9 is selected: 640 x 360, 512 x 288, 384 x 216, 256 x 144, 128 x 72

• When the aspect ratio 4:3 is selected: 640 x 480, 512 x 384, 384 x 288, 256 x 192, 128 x 96

Note

The preview frame will move in steps. Fine-tuned movement is not possible.

The video of the area inside the manipulated preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.

Click the [Digital PTZ] button.

In the Digital PTZ panel, move and resize the preview frame.

Important

Even if the camera angle is changed due to a slider operation or preset, the position of the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel

is fixed.

Preview Frame

M50

Note

The Digital PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.

Using Presets or the Home Position

You can use a registered preset or home position to specify the range for Digital PTZ.

If you select a preset, the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel moves to the preset position, and the video inside

the frame is displayed in the video display area.

Note

Exiting Digital PTZ

The Digital PTZ exits if you perform one of the following operations.

• Click the [Digital PTZ] button to disable it.

• Click the [Viewer PTZ] button to start the Viewer PTZ

Note

You can perform the following operations to continue Digital PTZ while the [Digital PTZ] button is active (purple).

– Click the [Close] button on the control display area to close the Digital PTZ panel

– Click the panorama display tab or snapshot tab to switch the panel in the control display area

H652

H651

Camera Viewer

You can take snapshots while checking the video in the video display area.

The snapshot panel is opened in the control display area and the still image from the instant that the button was

clicked is displayed.

If you click the [Snapshot] button again, the image displayed in the Snapshot panel will be updated.

Note

• The snapshot is saved as a JPEG file.

• The saved snapshots are the same size as the reception video size.

Saving Snapshots

Click the [Snapshot] button at the moment you want to capture a still image.

To save the snapshot, right-click on the Snapshot panel.

Click [Save Picture As] in the menu that is displayed.

Enter the desired file name and save the snapshot.

Manually record video being displayed in the video display area to a memory card inserted in the camera.

Note

• You can manually record video if the following conditions have been met.

– The memory card inserted in the camera is mounted.

– [Operation Settings] is set to [Save Logs and Videos] in [Video Record] > [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] (P. 215) in the

Setting Page.

• The format and size of the video recorded to a memory card depends on the settings configured on the Setting Page.

– Video format: [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Video Format] (P. 216)

– Video size: JPEG [Basic] > [Video] > [JPEG] > [Video Size: Upload / Memory card]

H.264 [Basic] > [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] > [Video Size]

Recording Videos Manually

The display of the [Memory Card Recording] button will change during video recording.

Recording Video to a Memory Card

If you have not obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button to

obtain the privileges.

Click the [Memory Card Recording] button.

Recording

Recording (while camera control privileges are not obtained)

Not recording (while camera control privileges are obtained)

Not recording (while camera control privileges are not obtained, or when no memory card is mounted to

the camera)

To stop video recording, click the [Memory Card Recording] button again.

Important

• Video manually recorded to the memory card will automatically be terminated after 300 seconds of recording.

• When recording manually, do not change the settings in the [Setting Page]. Doing so may result in the termination of the manual

recording.

• While manually recording to the memory card, you can continue to record even if you release camera control privileges or

disconnect the camera.

Camera Viewer

Confirming Recorded Video

Use the Recorded Video Utility to confirm and play back the video manually recorded to a memory card.

For details, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.

Open the [Video and Audio] menu to set the audio reception from the camera and the audio transmission from the Viewer

and the corresponding volumes.

Receiving Audio

Receive audio from the microphone connected to the camera and play it back in the Viewer.

Audio reception starts.

The [Audio Reception] button icon will change to active (purple) while receiving audio.

Note

• To receive audio, you must connect the microphone to the camera and set [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from

the Camera] to [Enable] in the Setting Page (P. 153).

• While the icon is active (purple), audio is constantly received even if you close the [Video and Audio] menu.

• To use the audio function in environments that use a proxy server, select [Use a proxy server for your LAN] in [Network and

Internet] > [Internet options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] > [Proxy server] in [Control Panel], then specify the camera IP

address in [Advanced] > [Exceptions].

Transmitting Audio

You can transmit audio received from an external device connected to the computer to a speaker with an amplifier

connected to the camera.

Receiving/Transmitting Audio

R13

M50

H652

H651

In the [Video and Audio] menu, click the [Audio Reception] button.

In [Output Volume], adjust the volume to an appropriate level using the slider.

In the [Video and Audio] menu, select the maximum audio transmission time.

Camera Viewer

Audio transmission starts.

The [Audio Transmission] button icon will change to active (purple) while transmitting audio.

Note

• To transmit audio, you must first set [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] to [Enable] in the Setting Page

(P. 153).

• While the icon is active (purple), audio is constantly transmitted even if you close the [Video and Audio] menu.

• To use the audio function in environments that use a proxy server, select [Use a proxy server for your LAN] in [Internet options] >

[Connections] tab > [LAN settings] > [Proxy server] in the Internet Explorer, then specify the camera IP address in [Advanced] >

[Exceptions].

• Only the Administrator can transmit audio from the Viewer.

Click the [Audio Transmission] button.

In [Input Volume], adjust the volume to an appropriate level using the slider.

In the [Event and Input/Output] menu, you can check the status of output/input operations of an external device,

intelligent functions, and occurrence of linked events.

Operating External Device Output

You can operate output for the external device set in [Event] > [External Device] (P. 161) on the Setting Page.

Click the icon to switch between the active (purple)/inactive (gray) status.

Output 1: Output active

Output 2: Output inactive

Note

To operate [External Device Output] output, it is necessary to obtain camera control privileges.

Checking the Status of Event Detection

(1) [External Device Input]

Displays the input status of the external device set in [Event] > [External Device] (P. 162) on the Setting Page.

When a contact input signal is received from an external device, input will be activated and the icon becomes green.

Example:

Input 1: Input inactive

Input 2: Input active

(2) [Intelligent Function (Image Detection)]

The status of video detection set in [Event] > [Intelligent Function] > [Video Detection] (P. 175) is displayed for each

detection setting number. When the detection settings configured in Intelligent Function (Moving Object Detection,

Abandoned Object Detection, Removed Object Detection, Camera Tampering Detection, Passing Detection, or

Intrusion Detection) are triggered, the corresponding icon will turn green.

Checking the Status of Event Detection

R13

M50

H652

H651

(1)

R13

M50

H652

H651

(2)

(4)

R13 M50

H652

H651

(3)

R13 R12

(5)

R13 M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

Camera Viewer

If a name is entered in [Detection Settings Name] in [Event] > [Intelligent Function] on the Setting Page (P. 180), that

name is displayed in [Setting 1] - [Setting 15].

Example:

Setting 1: Image Detection status ON

Other settings: Image Detection status OFF

Note

The icon indicating the detection status will be displayed for a maximum of five minutes (except for Moving Object Detection).

(3) [Intelligent Function (Auto Tracking)]

Displays the status of Auto Tracking set in [Event] > [Intelligent Function] > [Auto Tracking] (P. 192) in the Setting

Page. If detection is triggered, the icon will turn green.

Example:

Auto Tracking status ON

(4) [Intelligent Function (Audio Detection)]

Displays the status of [Volume Detection] or [Scream Detection] set in [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 164) in the

Setting Page. If detection is triggered, the icon will turn green.

Example:

Volume: Volume Detection status ON

Scream: Scream Detection status OFF

(5) [Linked Events]

Displays the status of linked events for Intelligent Function set with [Event] > [Linked Events] (P. 200) in the Setting

Page. If a linked event is triggered, the icon will turn green.

Example:

Setting 2: Linked Event status ON

Other settings: Linked Event status OFF

R13

R12

R13 M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

Chapter

Setting Page

The Setting Page enables you to configure all the settings required for using the camera. Please configure the

settings in the Setting page according to how the camera will be used, before you use the camera.

The Setting Page also provides menus for when the camera is in operation; for example, camera maintenance.

This section explains operations up to displaying the Setting Page, and common Setting Page operations.

Note

• The Setting Page can only be operated by administrators.

• Use the Camera Management Tool in advance to configure the administrator account and network settings (P. 39).

Accessing the Setting Page

Directly enter the IP address set in the Camera Management Tool (P. 40) to display the Setting Page of the camera.

Note

You can also access the Setting Page from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User

Manual”.

The user authentication window is displayed.

The Setting Page is displayed.

Note

The Viewer is displayed when [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] is set to [Display Viewer] in the setting menu (P. 107).

Setting Menu

(1) [Viewer] Button

Start the Camera Viewer (P. 53).

(2) Language Switch Button

Set the language to display on the screen.

(3) Setting Menus

If you click one of these items, its submenu (P. 92) will be displayed (excluding the [Memory Card] and [User

Page] menus). Click a submenu to navigate to its Setting Page.

How to Use The Setting Page

Launch the web browser.

Enter the IP address, and press the Enter key.

Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password (P. 39) and click [OK].

(3)

(1) (2)

Setting Page

Common Setting Page Operations

This section explains basic Setting Page operations, and operations common to all Setting Pages.

Note

If you have enabled settings in your web browser to not display dialog boxes, you may be unable to perform operations on the Setting

Page. If this happens, exit your web browser and launch it again.

Applying Changes to Settings

If you change a setting on the Setting Page, the [Apply] button on the upper right or lower right of the screen is no

longer grayed out and can be clicked.

Click [Apply] in this state to apply the changed settings.

Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.

Setting Changes Requiring Rebooting

Items that require the camera to be rebooted in order to apply the changed settings are indicated with an orange

symbol to their right.

When any item indicated with an orange symbol is changed, [Apply] shown at the top right and bottom right of each

Setting Page changes to [Apply and reboot].

Click [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings and reboot the camera.

Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.

Return to the Setting Menu

Click [Settings menu] at the top right of each Setting Page to return to the setting menu.

Important

• If you open another window or tab to access the camera while an authenticated web page is displayed, the authentication

information of the displayed web page may be discarded.

In this case, enter the authentication information again.

• To ensure security, exit the web browser after completing settings on the Setting Page and after using the Camera Viewer.

• Do not open multiple Setting Pages at one time and try to change the settings of a single camera.

Important

Setting changes will be lost if you navigate to another Setting Page without clicking [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. However,

changes for [Camera Angle] and [Initial Setting] are saved even if you navigate to another page without clicking [Apply], so click

[Clear] if you want to discard those settings. Be sure to click [Apply] or [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings.

Important

Do not use the [Back] or [Forward] buttons in the web browser to navigate Setting Pages. The changed settings may revert to the

original settings or unwanted setting changes may be applied.

Help

Click [Help] at the beginning of any setting item to display a detailed explanation of that setting item.

Setting Ranges and Character Limits

For settings where you must enter numerical values or characters, the setting range or limits on the number of

characters will be displayed.

Please enter the settings within the displayed limits.

Operating the Video Display Area

Some Setting Pages such as [Initial Setting], [Panorama] and [Intelligent Function] can be configured using the video

display area.

Note

• The displayed items will change depending on the Setting Page.

• Other users cannot access the Viewer while video is being displayed on the Setting Page. Also, video cannot be displayed or configured

while the administrator is connected to the Viewer.

(1) Video Display Area

Camera video is displayed here. Use the mouse to set the areas, etc. The operations on the video display area

are the same as in the Viewer (P. 68).

(2) Pan/Tilt Slider

Pan and tilt operations are the same as in the viewer (P. 68).

M50

R12

R13

M50R12R13

(5)

(7)

(9)

(8)

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(6)(2)

Setting Page

(3) Zoom Slider

Zoom operations are the same as in the viewer (P. 68).

(4) Panorama Screen

Displays the range of motion of the camera on the panorama screen. If a panorama image is registered in the

camera (P. 123), the panorama image is displayed. You can set areas, etc. using mouse operations on the

panorama screen for some Setting Pages.

(5) [Snapshot] Button

Open the snapshot window and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button (P. 79).

(6) [Reconnect] Button

Reconnects to the camera. You can use this when not connecting to the camera.

(7) [Screen Resize] Button

The size of the video display area is switched each time this button is clicked.

(8) [Switch Mouse Operation] Button

Click this button to perform camera pan/tilt operations on the video display area using the mouse while the

button is purple.

(9) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button

Click this to obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 67).

R13 R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

About Each Setting Page

This section will give an overview of each item in the Setting Menu and each submenu.

Each of the [Basic], [Video and Audio], [Video], and [Video Record] menus has a [Video] submenu, but the functions are all

common. The functions can be set in any of the menus and the settings will be reflected in all of the [Video] submenus.

• Network (P. 96)

Network settings for connecting to the camera.

• User Management (P. 100)

Use this to change administrator account information, add/

delete authorized users and set privileges for users.

The settings of this item are the same as those in [Security]

> [User Management]. Settings configured on one page

are also reflected on the other.

• Date and Time (P. 102)

Camera date and time settings.

• Video (P. 104)

General video settings, such as the size and quality of

video transmitted from the camera.

•Viewer (P.107)

Configure the startup, authorization, and view of the

Viewer.

Basic

Camera • Camera (P. 108)

Settings for the camera name and external input/output

devices, and for use and installation of the camera.

• Camera Angle (P. 45)

After installing the camera, set the camera angle, while

checking the displayed video.

• Initial Setting (P. 112)

Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at

camera start up.

• Day/Night Mode Focus (P. 120)

Set the focus positions for when Day/Night Mode are

switched.

• Panorama (P. 123)

Configure the creation and management of panorama

images.

• Restrict View (P. 127)

Set the range that the camera can capture.

• Preset (P. 131)

• Preset Tour (P. 134)

Configure the settings for automatically touring with

multiple presets registered in advance.

H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

Setting Page

Video Record • Video (P. 104)

• Upload (P. 156)

Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an

event is triggered.

• Memory Card (P. 215)

Perform memory card operations or configure settings.

The settings of this item are the same as those of the

[Memory Card] menu. Settings configured on one page

are also reflected on the other.

• E-mail Notification (P. 160)

Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified

recipient when an event is triggered.

Server • Server (P. 149)

Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage

or WS-Security time checks.

• Video Server (P. 152)

Settings for clients that can be connected to a video

server.

• Audio Server (P. 153)

Settings for audio transmission from the camera to the

computer, and audio reception from the computer to the

camera.

• RTP Server (P. 154)

Settings for RTP streaming.

R13 M50

H652

H651

Video and Audio • Video (P. 104)

• ADSR (P. 139)

ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size

Reduction.

Reduces the data size of transmitted H.264 video by

reducing the video quality of unspecified area.

• On-screen display (P. 141)

Displays the date and time, camera name and other text

on the Viewer.

• Privacy Mask (P. 143)

Configure a mask for the areas of the camera video you

want to mask.

• Audio (P. 147)

Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to

the camera, audio output from the Viewer and playback of

a sound clip.

R13

M50

H652 H651

H651

H652

M50

R13

R12

Video

Security

Memory Card (P. 215)

Maintenance

• User Management (P. 100)

The settings of this item are the same as those of the [User

Management] in [Basic] menu. Settings configured on one

page are also reflected on the other.

• Host Restrictions (P. 204)

Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses

can be set.

• SSL/TLS (P. 206)

Certificate creation and management, and encrypted

communication settings.

• 802.1X (P. 209)

Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication

status display, and for certificate administration.

•IPsec (P.211)

Settings for using IPsec.

Settings for recording video to a memory card when an event

is triggered.

The settings of this item are the same as those in [Video

Record] > [Memory Card]. Settings configured on one page

are also reflected on the other.

• General (P. 218)

Check the device information/settings, and licenses, and

reboot and initialize the device, etc.

• Backup / Restore (P. 220)

Perform backup and restoration.

• Update Firmware (P. 221)

Perform firmware updates.

• Log (P. 222)

Display logs and configure log notification.

User Page

Link to web page customized by the user.

For information on the User Page, contact a Canon Customer Service Center.

Event • External Device (P. 161)

Operation settings for external device output and for

external device input triggered events.

• Audio Detection (P. 164)

Detected changes in audio input from the microphone

connected to the camera can trigger operations such as

video recording or e-mail notification.

•Timer (P.167)

The timer function can generate events that can trigger

operations, such as video recording and e-mail

notifications, at regular intervals.

• Intelligent Function (P. 169)

Configure the intelligent functions such as moving object

detection, camera tampering detection, and intrusion

detection.

• Switch Day/Night (P. 199)

The camera angle can be moved to preset positions when

Day Mode and Night Mode are switched.

• Linked Event (P. 200)

By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered.

R13 M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

Setting Page

Video Output

When analog video output is enabled for the camera, a message is displayed in the following submenus of the Setting

Page.

– Video, Initial Setting, Day/Night Mode Focus, Preset, Preset Tour, ADSR, Privacy Mask, RTP Server, Upload, Memory

Card, Intelligent Function

Video output automatically reboots the camera after 30 minutes have elapsed.

After rebooting, video output is disabled and the submenus can be configured.

[Reboot]

To change video settings, click [Exec] to reboot the camera.

Note

For details on analog video output, please refer to the “Installation Guide”.

H652

Network settings for connecting to the camera.

LAN

Set the LAN communication method and size of video transmitted from the camera.

[LAN Interface]

Select the interface suited to the device for connecting to the camera. Generally use [Auto].

[Maximum Packet Size]

Enter the maximum packet size to be transmitted by the camera. Normally there is no need to change the default setting of

1500.

A setting of 1280 or greater is necessary when using IPv6.

When using ADSL, setting a slightly lower value may increase transmission efficiency.

IPv4

Settings for using IPv4 to connect to the camera. The IPv4 address can be assigned by the DHCP server automatically or

set manually.

[Basic] > [Network]

Configuring Network Settings

Important

If any network settings are changed, the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser. In this case, a confirmation

dialog box will be displayed when you click [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.

If you reboot the camera after changing settings and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for

connecting to the camera will be displayed in a message. If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your

system administrator.

The following settings can be configured here.

•LAN

•IPv4

•IPv6

• DNS

• mDNS

Setting Page

[IPv4 Address Setting Method]

Select the method for setting the IPv4 address.

For [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address into [IPv4 Address].

For [Auto (DHCP)], the settings acquired from the DHCP server will be automatically entered in [IPv4 Address], [Subnet

Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address].

[IPv4 Address]

When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address.

The IP address cannot start with 127., such as 127.0.0.1.

[Subnet Mask]

When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter the designated subnet mask values for each network.

[IPv4 Default Gateway Address]

When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter a default gateway IP address. Be sure to set this when

connecting the camera to a different subnet from that of the Viewer.

[AutoIP]

Select this to enable or disable AutoIP.

[IPv4 Address (AutoIP)]

When [AutoIP] is set to [Enable], an automatically set IPv4 address is displayed.

IPv6

Settings for using IPv6 to connect to the camera. The IPv6 address can be assigned by the RA or DHCPv6 server

automatically or set manually.

[IPv6]

Select this to enable or disable IPv6.

[Auto (RA)]

Select [Enable] to set an address automatically using RA (Router Advertisement, network information automatically

transmitted from a router).

[Auto (DHCPv6)]

Select [Enable] to use DHCPv6 to set an address automatically.

[IPv6 Address (Manual)]

Enter a fixed IPv6 address if you set the address manually.

[Prefix Length]

Enter a prefix length if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)].

Important

• Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] if you set the IPv4

address manually.

• If any of the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] or [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] settings are wrong, the camera may become

inaccessible via the network. If this occurs, use the Camera Management Tool to reset the address (P. 40).

Important

If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected as the IPv4 address setting method, the IPv4 address may not be assigned correctly in certain environments,

such as when a router is present between the DHCP server and the camera. If this occurs, select [Manual] and enter a fixed IPv4

address.

Important

Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv6 Address], [Prefix Length] and [IPv6 Default Gateway Address] if you set the IPv6 address

manually.

[IPv6 Default Gateway Address]

Enter a default gateway address if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)]. Be sure to set this when connecting the camera to a

different subnet from that of the Viewer.

[IPv6 Address (Auto)]

If [Enable] is specified in [IPv6] and [Enable] is specified in [Auto (RA)] and [Auto (DHCPv6)], then the automatically

acquired address will be shown.

Note

In an environment where IPv6 cannot be used, and IPv6/Auto is set to [Enable], then only the link-local address will be displayed in the

[IPv6 Address (Auto)] field.

DNS

Set the DNS server address. The DNS server address can be set manually or automatically assigned by a DHCP/DHCPv6

server.

[Name Server Address 1], [Name Server Address 2]

Enter the name server address you want to register. To register only one address, keep the [Name Server Address 2] field

blank.

Note

If [Name Server Address 1] is unavailable, [Name Server Address 2] will be accessed. However, [Name Server Address 2] must be set in

advance.

[Auto-Setting of Name Server Address]

Select the server to use for automatically setting the name server address.

To set [Use DHCP], select [Auto (DHCP)] in [IPv4 Address Setting Method] (P. 97).

To set [Use DHCPv6], select [Enable] in [IPv6], then select [Enable] in [Auto (DHCPv6)] (P. 97).

[Name Server Address (DHCP)]

Select [Use DHCP] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Auto-Setting of Name Server Address] to display the name server address

acquired from the DHCP server.

[Name Server Address (DHCPv6)]

Select [Use DHCPv6] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Auto-Setting of Name Server Address] to display the name server

address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.

[Host Name]

You can register the camera host name in the name server using alphanumeric characters.

Do not use “_” (underscore) in the host name in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.

[Host Name Registration with DDNS]

When you enter a name into [Host Name] and select [Enable], the host name will be registered in the name server.

Registering the host name to DDNS is useful when operating with [IPv4 Address Setting Method] set to [Auto (DHCP)]

(P. 97). DNS server registration settings must be set in advance. Contact your system administrator for the DNS server

settings.

[Search Domain]

Enter a domain name and click [Add] to add the domain name to the Search Domain List.

Specify the host name without specifying a domain name for a server, such as the upload server, to search domains in the

form “host name + domain name”, where the domain names are specified in the Search Domain List.

Do not use “_” (underscore) in the domain name in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.

[Search Domain List]

A list of domain names added using [Search Domain].

The function queries the DNS server for each domain name starting from the top of the list.

Use the ▲▼ buttons on the right to change the order of the domain names.

To delete a domain name, select one from the list and then click [Delete].

Setting Page

mDNS

This will configure settings for using multicast DNS. If you use mDNS, the IP address and host name of the camera will be

broadcast to other hosts on the network.

[Use mDNS]

Select this to enable or disable mDNS.

100

You can change the administrator account, add new authorized users, and set the privileges for authorized users and guest

users.

For details on user privileges, please refer to “Camera Viewer Access Restrictions” (P. 55).

[User Management] is the same as [Security] > [User Management]. Settings configured on one [User Management] page

are also reflected on the other.

Administrator Account

Set this when changing the account information for the administrator.

[Administrator Name]

Enter the administrator name using alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

[Password]

Enter the administrator password in alphanumeric characters.

If the Camera Viewer, etc., are connected, terminate the connection before changing the password.

[Confirm Password]

Enter the same password as above for confirmation.

Authorized User Account

Add authorized users.

[User Name], [Password]

To add the authorized user, enter the user name and password, then click [Add].

Enter the user name using alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

Enter the password in alphanumeric characters.

Up to 50 authorized users can be added.

[User List]

Displays a list of added authorized users.

[Basic] > [User Management]

Configuring Accounts and Privileges

Important

• To ensure system security, change the administrator password periodically. Do not forget the new password.

• If you forget the administrator password, restore the factory default settings (P. 245). Note, however, that this will reset all camera

settings to factory default settings including the administrator account, the network information, date and time.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Administrator Account

• Authorized User Account

• User Authority

Setting Page

101

The order of the list can be changed with the ▲▼ buttons on the right.

To delete an authorized user from the list, select the user and click [Delete].

User Authority

Set the privileges for authorized users and guest users. This setting enables you to set access restrictions for the Camera

Viewer (P. 55).

[Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], [Video Distribution]

[Audio Distribution]

Select the items for granting users privileges.

An authorized user has higher privileges than a guest user.

R13

M50

H652

H651

102

Camera date and time settings.

Current Date and Time

The date and time set in the camera are shown.

Setting

Set the date and time setting method, time zone and daylight saving time for the camera.

[Setting Method]

Select the date and time setting method.

The settings are configured as follows depending on the setting configured in [Setting Method].

[Set manually]

Set the desired date and time in [Date] and [Time].

Set the time in 24-hour format in <hour:minute:second> order.

[Synchronize with NTP server]

Select the setting method displayed in [Auto-Setting of NTP Server].

[Disable]

Enter the IP address or host name of the NTP server in [NTP Server].

[Use DHCP]

The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server. The

acquired NTP server address is displayed in [NTP Server (DHCP)].

In order to set [Use DHCP], you must change [Network] > [IPv4] > [IPv4 Address Setting Method] to [Auto (DHCP)]

(P. 97).

[Use DHCPv6]

The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.

The acquired NTP server address is displayed in [NTP Server (DHCPv6)].

In order to set [Use DHCPv6], you must change [Network] > [IPv6] > [IPv6] to [Enable], then set [Auto (DHCPv6)] to

[Enable] (P. 97).

[Use DHCP/DHCPv6]

The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server or

DHCPv6 server.

If the NTP server (address) can be acquired from both the DHCP server (IPv4) and DHCPv6 server, the NTP server

address acquired from the DHCP server (IPv4) will be used.

[Synchronize with computer time]

The date and time will be synchronized with that of the computer currently accessing the camera. After clicking [Apply],

[Setting Method] will change to [Set manually].

[Time Zone] is not automatically selected, so set it if necessary.

[Basic] > [Date and Time]

Setting the Date/Time

The following settings can be configured here.

• Current Date and Time

•Setting

Setting Page

103

Note

• If the NTP server IP address is incorrect or a connection with the NTP server cannot otherwise be established, the date and time will not

be changed.

• The NTP server query interval is 300 seconds. Synchronization will take time if there is a large difference between the time of the camera

and the time of the NTP server.

[Time Zone]

Select the appropriate time zone.

If the time zone is changed, the date and time display will update automatically according to the specified time zone.

[Daylight Saving Time]

Select whether to automatically adjust for daylight saving time to suit the time zone.

104

General video settings, such as the size and quality of JPEG and H.264 video transmitted from the camera.

[Video] is common with [Video] found in [Video and Audio] and [Video Record]. A setting configured in any of the [Video]

submenus will be reflected in the other [Video] submenus as well.

All Videos

Set the video size sets used by the camera.

All options in the [Video] submenu and the size sets that can be selected in [Video Size] in all of the Setting Pages are

determined by the video size set selected here.

This also determines the video sizes and screen sizes that can be selected by each Viewer.

[Video Size Set]

Categories and aspect ratios vary according to each video size set.

[Basic] > [Video]

Setting Video Size and Quality

Important

• The following may occur if video size, video quality and target bit rate are set higher, as this increases network load and data size per

frame.

– JPEG: The frame rate may drop

– H.264: Video may be temporarily disrupted

• In case of H.264 video, block noise may become noticeable if a large video size and low target bit rate are set.

• The data size may increase depending on the type or movement of the subject. If the frame rate remains low or other undesirable

conditions continue for a prolonged period, lower the video size or quality setting.

• The included RM-Lite can only record JPEG video.

[Video Size Set] Category Aspect Ratio

[1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180] 720p 16:9

[1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240] 4:3 4:3

The following settings can be configured here.

• All Videos

•JPEG

• H.264(1)

• H.264(2)

M50

Setting Page

105

JPEG

You can configure settings for the quality and size of JPEG video transmitted from the camera, as well as, the video size

when recording the camera video.

The video sizes that can be set or selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.

[Video Quality]

Select the video quality transmitted from the camera for each size in a video size set.

Greater values have higher quality.

[Video Quality: Digital PTZ]

Select the video quality for digital PTZ.

[Video Size: video Transmission]

Select the default video size transmitted from the camera when no video size has been specified by the Viewer.

[Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission]

Limit the maximum frame rate per second transmitted to reduce the viewer load. Up to 30 frames per second can be set.

[Video Size: Upload / Memory card]

Select the size of video when using the upload function (P. 156) or when recording to a memory card (P. 215).

Set whether to upload a video or record it to a memory card with [Video Record] > [Upload] or [Memory Card] > [Video

Record Action] (P. 156).

H.264(1)

Settings for H.264(1) video transmitted from the camera.

The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.

[Video Size]

Select the size of the video transmitted from the camera.

[Bit Rate Control]

Set the video bit rate.

If you select [Use bit rate control], please set [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]. If you select [Do not use bit rate control], please set

[Video Quality].

[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]

You can select the target bit rate if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Use bit rate control].

[Video Quality]

You can select the video quality if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Do not use bit rate control].

Greater values have higher quality.

[Video Size Set] Category Aspect Ratio

[1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] 1080p 16:9

[1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180] 720p 16:9

[1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240] 4:3 4:3

Important

Changing the [Video Size Set] selection and clicking [Apply and reboot] will disconnect all connections and then change all the video

sizes. Consequently, users connected to the camera must reconnect.

If the [Video Size Set] selection is changed, review the following settings and check the operation.

– ADSR (P. 140)

– Privacy Mask (P. 143)

– Intelligent Function (P. 169)

– Preset (P. 131)

– View Restriction (P. 128)

– Camera Angle (P. 47)

R13 R12

H652

H651

R13

R12 M50

H651

M50

H652 H651

106

[Frame Rate (fps)]

Select the video frame rate.

[I Frame Interval (sec)]

Select the I frame interval (sec) for H.264 video.

H.264(2)

Settings for H.264(2) video transmitted from the camera.

The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.

[H.264(2)]

Select [Enable] to dual stream H.264 video.

[Video Size], [Bit Rate Control], [Target Bit Rate (kbps)], [Video Quality], [Frame Rate (fps)], [I Frame Interval (sec)]

Please refer to each setting in “H.264(1)”.

Important

• When [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] video is used for memory card recording and upload, the following restrictions apply to the Setting.

– [Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control] only

– [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less

– [I Frame Interval (sec)]: either [0.5], [1], or [1.5]

• When dual streaming H.264 videos, setting the video size for H.264(1) and H.264(2) to the following combinations restricts the frame

rate to a maximum of 15 fps. For all other combinations, a frame rate of up to 30 fps can be selected.

• The included RM-Lite cannot record H.264 video.

H.264(1) H.264(2)

1920 x 1080 All sizes

All sizes 1920 x 1080

1280 x 960 1280 x 960

1280 x 720 1280 x 720

Setting Page

107

Configure the startup, authorization, and view of the Viewer.

General

[Default Page]

Sets the Setting Page or the Viewer as the first page to display when the camera is connected.

If users other than the administrator use the Viewer, set [Default Page] to [Display Viewer].

Viewer Settings

[User Authentication]

Displays the user authentication screen when the camera is connected to the Viewer (P. 53). If you select [Authenticate],

only the administrator or an authorized user (P. 100) can connect.

[Rotate Video Display]

If you select [Rotate clockwise 90 degrees] or [Rotate counterclockwise 90 degrees], video is displayed in portrait

orientation in the Camera Viewer. Use this to rotate the camera 90° to capture video in portrait orientation.

Note

• Rotation of the video display only affects the Viewer. The video in the video display area of the Setting Page is not rotated. Uploads and

video stored on the memory card are not rotated.

• If you rotate the video display, the on-screen display is also rotated.

[Basic] > [Viewer]

Configuring the Viewer

The following settings can be configured here.

• General

• Viewer Settings

H652 H651

Camera Viewer video when [Rotate clockwise 90 degrees] is set

108

Settings for the camera name and external input/output devices, and for camera use and installation settings.

Camera Name

Set the camera name.

[Camera Name]

Enter any camera name. Be sure to enter a name in [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)].

Camera Control

Set various controls for easier viewing of video.

[Digital Zoom]

Select this to enable or disable digital zoom.

If [Enable] is selected, the area indicating digital zoom will be displayed next to the zoom slider in the Viewer (P. 68).

Unlike optical zoom, the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.

[Enhanced Digital Zoom]

Select this to enable or disable the enhanced digital zoom.

When the video size is small, digital zoom can be used to enlarge it up to the maximum size resolution with reduced video

deterioration.

When [Enable] is selected, an area indicating the enhanced digital zoom and a horizontal line (blue) indicating the

enhanced digital zoom telephoto end are displayed on the zoom slider of the Viewer (P. 68).

[Maximum Digital Zoom Magnification]

Sets the maximum zoom magnification for digital zoom.

[Image Stabilizer]

Select this to enable or disable blur reduction in video due to camera vibration.

[Camera] > [Camera]

Setting General Camera Controls

The following settings can be configured here.

• Camera Name

• Camera Control

• Day/Night (when Auto is set)

• Installation Conditions

• Camera Position Control

• External Input Device 1, 2

• External Output Device 1, 2

R13 R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

Setting Page

109

If there is still blur after selecting [On1], select [On2].

The angle of view will be narrower and video noisier when using the Image Stabilizer, compared to when it is not used.

[Smart Shade Control Strength (Auto)]

Select the control strength when [Smart Shade Control] (P. 116) is set to [Auto].

• [Mild]: Select if noise is noticeable.

• [Medium]: Recommended setting for Auto mode (default setting).

• [Strong]: Select to increase visibility in dark areas.

[Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)]

Select the strength of compensation when [Haze Compensation] (P. 117) is set to [Auto].

Note

When [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] and [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] is set to [Strong], contrast may be strong if the

subject is not obscured by haze. If this happens, set [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] to [Mild].

[Infrared Light Strength (Auto)]

Select the infrared illumination strength when you have selected [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] or

[Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] for [Exposure] (P. 115).

Note

• If all or part of the image appears to have a white glow, there is a possibility that a wall (even a wall not in the image) is reflecting the

infrared lighting. If this occurs, please adjust the camera angle.

• When using the infrared lighting, and there is a problem in getting the desired contrast on the object (would like the image brighter or

darker), please adjust the Exposure Compensation (P. 115) and/or the Metering Mode (P. 116).

[Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction]

When [Enable] is selected, noise reduction is automatically adjusted according to movement. For scenes in which there is

little movement, noise reduction is increased and data size decreases.

[Pan/Tilt Speed Control]

Select the pan/tilt control mode.

If [Control by zoom position] is selected, the pan/tilt speed will be slower in telephoto, and faster in wide-angle.

[Auto Flip]

Select this to enable or disable Auto Flip.

If you enable Auto Flip and tilt the camera using the video display area in the Viewer (P. 68), the video will flip when the tilt

angle of the camera nears 100°. Because this operation is effectively the same as panning 180°, at the same time that the

video flips, the position of the pan/tilt slider knob moves to the pan/tilt position after flipping.

Important

• The image stabilizer is not effective when the subject is shaking.

• Stabilization is not effective beyond a certain degree of vibration or for momentary vibrations.

• If you select [On2], It is recommended to select a video reception size less than [640 x 480].

• If you use stabilization, please refer to the information listed in the following “Important” sections.

– The “Important” section in “Setting Privacy Mask” (P. 145)

– The “Important” section in “Setting View Restriction” (P. 128).

– The “Important” section in “Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer” (P. 62).

– The “Important” section in “Registering Presets” (P. 131).

Important

The intended effect may not be achievable, depending on the size and movement speed of the subject.

R13

R12

M50

H652

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12

110

Note

If you set Auto Flip to [Enable], some of the settings in [Restrict View] are disabled (P. 128).

If tracking a subject that passes directly under a ceiling mounted camera (tilt angle 90°), the video will flip as the tilt angle

nears 100° without the subject appearing inverted.

Day/Night (When Auto Is Set)

Set conditions for switching Day Mode and Night Mode when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].

[Switching Brightness]

Select the brightness for switching Day/Night Mode when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].

Select [Darker] if you want to capture video in color as much as possible.

Select [Brighter] to reduce noise. Note that this mode switches to monochrome sooner.

[Response (sec.)]

Select the number of seconds for determining when to switch Day/Night Mode, when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto]. Day/Night

Mode switches when the brightness continues to exceed or fall below the brightness set in [Switching Brightness] within

any of the settings for the number of seconds selected.

Select [30] or [60] if brightness changes frequently, such as when a light source passes in front of the camera. Select [5] or

[10] if change in brightness is minimal.

R12

R13

Pan: 180°

Tilt: -50°

Pan: 180°

Tilt: -90°

Pan: 180°

Tilt: -100°



Pan: 0°

Tilt: -80°

Pan: 0°

Tilt: -50°

If the tilt angle exceeds 100°, Auto Flip will occur, and

the video and coordinates will be flipped.

Setting Page

111

Installation Conditions

Configure settings for camera use suitable for the location the camera will be installed.

[LED Setting]

Select whether to turn on the LED indicating the camera operation status.

Even if you set [Turn Off], the LED will light for several seconds during startup.

[Image Flip]

Select whether to vertically flip the video.

Select the setting suited to the camera installation method, such as ceiling mounting or placing on a desk.

Camera Position Control

Settings for camera use when there are no camera control restrictions for users or requests for camera control privileges.

[Restricted to Presets]

Restricts camera control of the camera angle, such as with Camera Viewer, to presets, including the home position, for

users other than administrators.

[Camera Position without Control]

Select the camera operation when there are no users with camera control privileges.

If [Return to Home Position] has been selected, the home position of the camera must be set in advance with [Camera] >

[Preset] > [Preset Registration] (P. 131).

External Input Device 1, 2

Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external input device being connected.

There are two external input device terminals on the camera.

[Device Name]

Enter the name of the device connected to the external input device terminal.

External Output Device 1, 2

Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external output device being connected.

There are two external output device terminals on the camera.

[Device Name]

Enter the name of the device connected to the external output device terminal.

M50

R13 R12 M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

112

Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at camera start up. If you change settings, the changes are

immediately reflected in the video display area and Viewer, even if you do not click [Apply].

A message confirms whether you want to display the current camera status as the initial settings if the current camera

status differs from the settings registered as the initial settings when you access [Initial Setting].

If you click [OK], the current camera status is displayed as the initial settings. If you click [Cancel], the current camera

status is ignored and the settings registered as the initial settings are displayed.

Camera Position

Sets the camera position at camera start up.

Note

You can operate the frame on the panorama screen or the video display area to perform pan, tilt, and zoom operations.

[Pan/Tilt/Zoom position]

Register the present pan, tilt, and zoom positions as the initial setting. If you select [Unregister], the camera will return to the

pan, tilt, and zoom positions as when the camera was turned off the next time it is booted.

Note

When [Digital PTZ Position] is set to [Unregister], you can perform pan, tilt, and zoom operations on the video display area using Area

Zoom (P. 69).

[Digital PTZ Position]

If you select [Register], a yellow frame is displayed in the video display area. Operate the frame to specify the Digital PTZ

trim position during startup.

[Camera] > [Initial Setting]

Setting Initial Video Settings

Important

If you change the zoom after configuring the intelligent function, privacy mask, preset, and ADSR, those settings must be configured

again.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Camera position

• Camera Settings

H651

H652

M50

R12

R13

R13 R12 M50

M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

113

Note

The Digital PTZ trim frame (yellow) displayed during startup can be set to incremental sizes. The sizes that can be set are the same as the

Digital PTZ of the Viewer (P. 77).

Camera Settings

Sets the camera settings at camera start up.

[Simple Camera Settings]

Recommended settings for [Camera Settings] are displayed according to the selected type. You can also change the

recommended settings as required and click [Apply].

[Focus]

Selects the focus.

[Auto]

Automatically adjusts the focus.

[Manual]

You can click and hold the [Near] and [Far] buttons in [Adjust Focus] to adjust the focus in the near and far directions.

When you click [Exec] in [One-shot AF], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual mode.

The following procedure enables you to adjust the focus appropriately.

1. Select [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] in [Exposure], and move the aperture slider to the right limit to fully open the

aperture. The depth of field becomes shallow, and you can adjust the focus appropriately.

2. To adjust the focus, click and hold the [Far] or [Near] button in [Adjust Focus], or click [Exec] in [One-shot AF].

3. When you have finished adjusting the focus, change [Exposure] to an appropriate setting.

Note

When using [Adjust Focus], it is recommended that you use [Adjust Focus] in [Camera Angle] > [Camera Settings] (P. 49).

Type Motion Priority Depth Priority Low Light Visibility Data Size

Reduction Standard Setting

Usage scenario

Reduces

vibrations for

moving subjects.

Focuses within a

wide range, from

near to far.

Brightens by

raising the

sensitivity for dark

subjects.

Reduces the data

size in low-light

conditions.

Cancels the

scenario settings

and restores the

factory default

settings.

[Exposure] Auto (Shutter-

priority AE)

Auto (Aperture-

priority AE) Auto Auto Auto

[AGC Limit]66646

[Shutter Speed] 1/1000 (sec.) ----

[Slow Shutter] - Disable 1/8 (sec.) 1/8 (sec.) Disable

[Smart Shade

Control] Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

[Noise Reduction] Mild Standard Strong Strong Standard

[Sharpness]36333

[Color Saturation]44424

[Haze

Compensation] Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Important

Note the following regarding [Simple Camera Settings].

– [Motion Priority]: The range in which the appropriate exposure can be maintained becomes narrower.

Flickering may occur due to fluorescent lighting, etc.

– [Depth Priority]: The range in which the appropriate exposure can be maintained may become narrower.

– [Low Light Visibility]: Residual images may appear for moving subjects in dark situations.

– [Data Size Reduction]: Residual images may appear for moving subjects in dark situations.

H651H652

M50

H651

114

[Fixed at infinity]

You can set the focus so that it is fixed near infinity.

Note

• Focusing may be difficult for the following types of subjects when using [Auto].

Difficult to Focus Subjects

• It is recommended that you check that the camera is focused whenever you reboot the camera.

• The estimated focus ranges depending on the [Day/Night] setting are shown in the following table.

* Using infrared illumination from an external device may throw the camera out of focus.

You can use [Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus] > [Compensate for light source] to focus according to the wavelength of an

infrared light (P. 120).

[One-shot AF]

Use when [Focus] is set to [Manual]. When you click [Exec], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to

manual.

[Adjust Focus]

If the [Focus] is set to [Manual], you can click and hold the [Near] and [Far] buttons to adjust the focus in the near and far

directions.

Important

• The focus you set is also applied to other users.

• Depending on the lighting used, focus may not be maintained when switching between [Day Mode] and [Night Mode]. Focus when

switching between Day/Night Mode can be set in [Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus].

• If you select [Manual] in [Exposure] and set the shutter speed to [1/1 sec], the camera will be out of focus if [Auto] is set. In this

case, adjust the focus with [Manual].

• If you set the focus [Manual], it will remain fixed.

• In conditions where an outdoor scene is captured from an indoor location through a glass window, the camera may focus on the

glass if there is dust or water on the surface. Install the camera at the shortest possible distance from the glass surface.

Focus

Day/Night Settings

Day mode Night mode

Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto

Auto/Manual 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 2.0 m (6.6 ft.) – infinity 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 2.0 m (6.6 ft.) – infinity

Auto/Manual 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – infinity 5.0m (16.4 ft.) – infinity 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – infinity 5.0m (16.4 ft.) – infinity

Auto/Manual 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity

Fixed at Infinity Fixed near infinity*

A white wall or other subject

lacking bright/dark contrast

A slanting

subject

A subject reflecting

strong light

A subject consisting of only

slant lines or horizontal stripes

A subject having no form,

such as flame or smoke

A subject seen

through glass

A fast moving

subject

A dark area or

night view

Subjects both

near and far

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

H652

H651

Setting Page

115

[Exposure]

Selects an exposure mode.

Note

If [Auto] is selected in [Day/Night], select either [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] for

[Exposure].

[Auto]

Automatically controls the exposure.

[Auto (Flickerless)]

Automatically adjusts the shutter speed according to the brightness of the usage environment. Video flickering caused

by fluorescent lights, etc., is reduced.

[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]

Automatically adjusts the aperture and gain according to the specified [Shutter Speed].

[Auto (Aperture-priority AE)]

Automatically adjusts the gain and shutter speed according to the specified [Aperture].

[Manual]

Manually set [Shutter Speed], [Aperture], and [Gain].

Cannot be set when [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].

[AGC Limit]

Select the Auto Gain Control (AGC) limit value for increasing gain to brighten video in low light conditions.

The greater the value, the higher the sensitivity will become, but video noise will increase.

[Slow Shutter]

If [Exposure] is set to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)], a minimum shutter speed from can be

selected. If you select [Disable], the minimum shutter speed is [1/30] seconds.

Slower shutter speeds generate afterimages in video when capturing a moving subject.

[Shutter Speed]

When [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] or [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], you can select the shutter speed.

If [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is set, a speed from [1/2] to [1/16000] seconds can be selected.

If [Manual] is set, a speed from [1/1] to [1/16000] seconds can be selected.

When capturing a moving subject, selecting a higher shutter speed can reduce blurry video capture.

[Aperture]

If [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] or [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set a desired aperture.

Moving the slider to the left closes the aperture and darkens the image. Moving the slider to the right opens the aperture

and brightens the image.

[Gain]

If [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set the sensitivity to affect brightness.

Moving the slider to the left darkens the video, and moving it to the right brightens video.

[Exposure Compensation]

When [Exposure] is set other than [Manual], you can adjust the brightness of the video by selecting the [Exposure

Compensation].

Important

• [AGC Limit] will not function if [Exposure] is set to [Manual] or [Auto (Flickerless)].

• Minimum subject illumination may change when [AGC Limit] is set.

Important

• If a traffic signal, electronic scoreboard, etc. is captured the video may flicker. In this case, try changing [Exposure] to [Auto (Shutter-

priority AE)] and then select a shutter speed lower than 1/100 seconds so that the condition improves.

• Setting a slow shutter speed may prevent the intelligent function from working correctly. Select a shutter speed that suits the capture

conditions and purpose.

116

[Metering Mode]

When [Exposure] is set a value other than [Manual], you can selects a metering mode.

[Center-Weighted]

Performs photometry with the entire screen center-weighted.

Even if there is a slight difference in light and dark around the screen, subjects near the center will have the appropriate

exposure.

Use this when the subject is near the center of the screen.

[Average]

Performs photometry with the average of the entire screen.

This enables stable exposure to be obtained even in environments with large differences in light and dark on the screen.

Use this to stabilize the exposure for scenes when cars are passing or people are entering and exiting.

[Spot]

Performs photometry with the center of the screen.

This enables the appropriate exposure to be obtained for subjects in the center of the screen, regardless of differences

in light and dark around the screen.

Use this to match the exposure with the center of the screen when the subject is hit by spotlights or backlit.

[Smart Shade Control]

If the background is bright and the subject is hard to see, this function brightens dark areas without affecting bright areas to

make the subject easier to see.

This is different from Backlight Compensation (P. 73). This function suppresses over-exposure of highlights while

compensating for under-exposure in dark areas of the video.

[Manual]

Set the level of compensation in [Smart Shade Control Level].

[Auto]

Performs automatic control with both smart shade control function and exposure compensation functions to prevent

blocked up under-exposure and over-exposure.

[Smart Shade Control Level]

When Smart Shade Control is set to [Manual], set a compensation level.

Note

• The video data size increases if you set [Auto] or [Manual] for smart shade control.

• Screen noise may increase if you set smart shade control to [Manual] and the control level to strong. Set the control level to mild to

reduce the noise.

[White Balance]

Select the white balance according to the light source to achieve natural color in the video.

Important

The setting is not available if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].

Important

• [Auto] cannot be selected for [Smart Shade Control] if [Exposure] is set to [Manual].

• [Smart Shade Control] is not available if [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].

Important

• When the subject has only one color, is under low light conditions, or when sodium lamps, mercury lamps or certain other fluorescent

lighting is used, [Auto] may not adjust colors appropriately.

• If [Auto] is set, and the subject appears greenish under mercury lamps, select [Mercury Lamp]. If the colors of the screen are not

appropriate under a mercury lamp even when you select [Mercury Lamp], use [One-shot WB].

• Since the light source selection options are based on representative characteristics, appropriate colors may not be achieved

depending on the available light source. If this occurs, use the [One-shot WB] function.

Setting Page

117

[Auto]

Automatically adjusts the white balance.

[Manual]

Operate [One-shot WB], [R Gain], and [B Gain] to manually set the white balance.

[Daylight Fluorescent]

Select this when capturing under a daylight fluorescent lamp.

[White Fluorescent]

Select this when capturing under a daylight fluorescent lamp or white fluorescent lamp.

[Warm Fluorescent]

Select this when capturing under a warm fluorescent lamp.

[Mercury Lamp]

Select this when capturing under a mercury lamp.

[Sodium Lamp]

Select this when capturing under an orange sodium lamp.

[Halogen Lamp]

Select this when capturing under a halogen lamp or incandescent lamp.

[One-shot WB]

If you set white balance to [Manual], this will force the white balance to match the light source and lock the setting.

Setting Method Example:

Illuminate a white subject (white paper, etc.) using the light source, making sure the subject fills the entire screen, and then

click [Exec].

[R Gain]

If you set white balance to [Manual], set the Red gain values.

[B Gain]

If you set white balance to [Manual], set the Blue gain values.

[Noise Reduction]

Select a noise reduction level. This setting is generally more effective in low-light conditions.

When set to [Strong], the noise reduction effect is increased, but residual images are more likely to appear.

When set to [Mild], the noise reduction effect is decreased and resolution is increased, but the video file size becomes

larger.

[Sharpness]

Select a sharpness level.

When set toward [Strong] the video becomes sharper, and when set toward [Mild] the video becomes softer.

When set toward [Strong] the video file size becomes larger.

[Color Saturation]

Select a color saturation level.

[Haze Compensation]

If the subject is obscured by haze, this adjusts contrast in the video to improve subject visibility.

[Manual]

Set the level of compensation in [Haze Compensation Level].

[Auto]

Automatically performs haze compensation. Select the compensation strength in [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)]

(P. 109).

Important

• When [Clear IR Mode] is set to [Enable], the setting of [White Balance] cannot be changed.

• When [Day/Night] is set to [Night Mode] (including when it is set to [Auto] and Night Mode is judged to be applicable), the white

balance function cannot be used.

• If a subject that seldom changes is captured in a location where the light source changes gradually, such as when capturing a subject

continuously day and night, appropriate colors may not be achieved. In this case, appropriate colors can be achieved by changing the

captured video with settings such as [One shot WB].

M50

118

Note

• When [Auto] or [Manual] is selected for [Haze Compensation], the video data size may increase.

• If using [Haze Compensation] causes a strong difference in video brightness, set [Haze Compensation] to [Manual] and set a weaker

compensation level.

[Haze Compensation Level]

When Haze Compensation is set to [Manual], set the compensation level.

[Clear IR Mode]

Uses infrared light to reduce shade and heat shimmer in far backgrounds to make the video clearer.

If you select [Enable], the video becomes black and white.

[Day/Night]

Select a capture mode according to the brightness of the installation environment.

[Auto]

The camera automatically determines ambient brightness and switches to Day Mode or Night Mode.

[Day Mode]

Captures normal color video.

[Night Mode]

Removes the infrared filter to increase sensitivity. Video turns to monochrome.

[Use Infrared]

Select whether to use infrared illumination operated with [Day/Night].

[Day/Night Operation]

Linked to Day/Night. Turns on infrared illumination in Night Mode.

[Disable]

Infrared illumination is not used.

Important

[Haze Compensation] cannot be used if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].

Important

• Since video is captured using infrared light, the video may be affected in the following ways. Confirm the effectiveness before use.

– Red colors may appear white.

– Leaves of plants may appear white.

– Water surfaces may appear black.

• The effect may differ depending on the weather.

• Since performance decreases in low-light conditions, use Night Mode in dark situations.

Important

• [Day/Night] cannot be set if [Clear IR Mode] is set to [Enable].

• If you use [Auto], conduct a thorough operation test beforehand to check the effectiveness of the setting.

• When [Auto] is selected, set [Exposure] to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)], or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)].

However even if you set [Day/Night] to [Auto], the night mode may not be enabled, depending on the shutter speed when [Auto

(Shutter-priority AE)] is set or depending on the aperture when [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] is set.

• If you exit the Viewer while [Day Mode] or [Night Mode] is set, these will remain in effect, even if [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].

To enable [Auto] Day/Night Mode, set [Day/Night] to [Auto] before exiting the Viewer.

• If you use [Auto], the infrared filter may move several times while the mode is switching between Day Mode and Night Mode. You will

not be able to use pan, tilt, zoom and manual focus during this period.

• If you use infrared illumination from an external device in Night Mode, turn on the infrared illumination before switching to Night Mode.

M50

H652

Setting Page

119

Note

• If all or part of the image appears to have a white glow, there is a possibility that a wall (even a wall not in the image) is reflecting the

infrared lighting. If this occurs, please adjust the camera angle.

• If you use the Sunshade Cover (sold separately) in conjunction with infrared illumination, switching between day/night using [Day/Night]

> [Auto] may not be possible due to the angle of the lens. In this case, adjust the angle of the lens (please refer to "Installation Guide"), or

configure [Switch Day/Night] using [Timer] (P. 168).

[Infrared Light Level]

Sets the infrared illumination strength when [Day/Night Operation] is selected in [Use Infrared].

Important

[Infrared Light Level] can only be set when [Exposure] is set to [Manual].

H652

120

Set the focus position when switching day/night. It is necessary to change the focus position since the wavelengths of

regular lighting such as fluorescent lamps and infrared lighting differ.

Note

You can set [Day/Night Mode Focus] if the following conditions have been met.

– When [Focus] (P. 113) is set to [Manual]

– When [Clear IR Mode] (P. 118) is set to [Disable]

Day/Night Mode Focus

[Day/Night Mode Focus Control]

Set the focus control method when switching day/night.

[Use One-shot AF]

Select this to use One-shot AF when switching Day/Night Mode.

[Move to registered focus position]

When switching Day/Night Mode, the focus positions preregistered for Day Mode or Night Mode in [Register focus

position] will be used. For more information, please refer to “Registering a Focus Position”.

[None]

When switching Day/Night Mode, the camera automatically focuses on each of the fluorescent lighting focus positions

set beforehand for Day Mode and Night Mode.

[Compensate for light source]

Adjust the focus position to suit the light source when switching to Night Mode.

[Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus]

Day/Night Mode Focus

Important

Even if you use [Day/Night Mode Focus] with the night mode, the camera may be out of focus due to changes in the light source (when

sunlight mixes with infrared lighting, etc.).

Important

When using [Use One-shot AF] and switching between Day/Night Mode, it may not be possible to focus on the intended subject if

another subject, such as a person, passes in front of the camera.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Day/Night Mode Focus

• Camera Control

M50

R13

R12 M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

121

[Light Source]

If you selected [Compensate for light source], select the light source.

[Fluorescent]

Select this option to capture video under fluorescent, LED, sodium or mercury lighting.

[Halogen Lamp]

Select this option to capture video under halogen or incandescent lighting.

[Infrared Light (740nm)]

Select this option to capture video under infrared (740 nm wavelength) illumination.

[Infrared Light (850nm)]

Select this option to capture video under infrared (850 nm wavelength) illumination.

[Infrared Light (940nm)]

Select this option to capture video under infrared (940 nm wavelength) illumination.

Registering a Focus Position

If you selected [Move to registered focus position] for [Day/Night Mode Focus Control], register a focus position.

[Registered] is displayed for [Day Mode Focus Position].

The settings are saved to the camera.

Note

• If you select an item other than [Move to registered focus position] without first clicking [Apply], the focus position returns to

[Unregistered].

• Click [Clear] to set the focus position again. The focus position setting is discarded and the setting saved in the camera is

restored.

• See the page (P. 114) for the focus ranges when using Day/Night Mode settings.

Camera Control

Set the camera focus adjustment and day/night capture mode when controlling day/night mode focus.

[One-shot AF]

Use when [Move to registered focus position] is selected in [Day/Night Mode Focus Control]. When you click [Exec], it will

focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual mode.

[Adjust Focus]

Use when [Move to registered focus position] is selected in [Day/Night Mode Focus Control]. Click [Far] and [Near] to

adjust focus.

[Day/Night]

Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment.

[Auto]

The camera automatically determines ambient brightness and switches to Day Mode or Night Mode.

H652

H651

In [Camera Control], select [Day Mode] for [Day/Night].

Use [One-shot AF] or [Adjust Focus] in [Camera Control] while viewing the video display area to adjust the camera

to a suitable focus position under the lighting conditions of day mode.

Click [Register] for [Day Mode Focus Position].

In [Camera Control], change [Day/Night] to [Night Mode].

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register the focus position under the Night Mode lighting conditions.

Click [Apply].

122

[Day Mode]

Captures normal color video.

[Night Mode]

Removes the infrared filter to increase sensitivity. Video turns to monochrome.

Setting Page

123

You can create a panorama image that captures the entire area that can be captured by the camera.

Created panorama images are displayed in the Viewer and part of the Setting Page.

Creating a Panorama Image

A panorama image can be used in the Viewer and for a privacy mask by clicking [Apply] to save it to the camera after

capturing.

Note

• While a panorama image is being captured, the Image Stabilizer is temporarily disabled.

• The following users will be disconnected while creating a panorama image.

– All users except for administrators

– Users not connected via RTP

• When a small value is entered for [Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission] (P. 105) in [Video] > [JPEG], panorama capture is slowed

down.

Set the range for panorama creation. This enables the panorama creation time to be reduced.

[Specify the panorama creation area]

If you select [Specified], the panorama image is created within a set area that can be captured by the camera. If

you select [Not specified], the panorama image is created within the entire area that can be captured by the

camera.

If you selected [Not specified], proceed to step 3.

[Camera] > [Panorama]

Creating a Panorama Image

Important

• If you change the privacy mask settings in [Privacy Mask], it is recommended that you create the panorama image again to reflect the

new privacy mask settings in the panorama image.

• If you have changed the camera installation method settings, recapture the panorama image.

R13

R12

M50

The following settings can be configured here.

• Panorama Creation Area

• Panorama Screen

• Capture Settings

Set [Panorama Creation Area]

124

Operate the camera angle to get the positioning value in the video display area, and specify the panorama

creation range.

[Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit]

Operate the camera angle to the upper limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit to set in the video display area.

Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the panorama creation range frame.

Click [Preview] in [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit] to move the preview frame to the upper

limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit of the current panorama creation range frame and display it in the video

display area.

Two types of frames are displayed for panorama images.

(1) Panorama creation area frame (red frame)

Indicates the capture area of the panorama image. You can also drag the panorama creation area frame to

set the capture range for the panorama image.

Note

If the preview frame is positioned outside the panorama creation area frame you have changed, the camera position is

moved inside the panorama creation area frame.

(2) Preview frame (blue frame)

Indicates the current position displayed in the video display area.

For details on the settings, please refer to “Capture Settings” (P. 126).

[Capture Settings] are applied when panorama capture is started, and the previous settings are restored after

panorama capture is complete.

Set the panorama creation area using the video display area.

Set [Capture Settings] as necessary.

In [Start], click [Exec].

(2)

(1)

Setting Page

125

Capturing starts, and the panorama image is created.

Click [Cancel] to cancel capturing.

To recapture part of the image:

A lattice frame is displayed on the created panorama image.

Right-click with the mouse pointer over the area to recapture and select [Recapture] to recapture that area only.

To capture the entire panorama image again:

Click [Exec] of [Start] again.

The created image is not yet saved in the camera.

The panorama image is saved in the camera and reflected in the other settings.

Deleting a Panorama Image from the Camera

You can delete a panorama image saved in the camera.

The displayed panorama image is cleared.

The confirmation message is displayed.

The panorama image saved in the camera is deleted.

Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File/Opening the Image File

The captured panorama image can be saved as an image file and image files can be opened as panorama images.

Only image files in the JPEG format can be used.

Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File

In [Finish], click [Exec].

Click [Apply].

Click [Exec] of [Delete].

Click [Apply].

Click [OK].

After creating the panorama image, click [Exec] in [Save to file].

In the displayed dialog box, select the folder to save the file in, and enter the file name.

Click [Save].

126

The image file is saved in the specified location.

Opening the Image File

The panorama image is displayed.

Capture Settings

These settings will be applied at the panorama image capture start time and will revert back to their previous settings once

capture is completed.

[Exposure Lock]

The exposure for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.

[White Balance Lock]

The white balance for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.

[Focus Lock]

The focus for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked for the entire scene during capture.

In [Load from file], click [Exec].

In the displayed dialog box, select the image file to use and click [Open].

Setting Page

127

Set the range that the camera can capture.

You can use this, for example, to limit zoom or the field of view to a certain range when publishing live video.

Scope of View Restriction Settings

Restrictions set by the view restriction function are applied in the following cases.

• When the Camera Viewer is accessed with authorized user or guest user privileges.

• When accessed via RM-Lite.

• For presets or functions that move to preset positions.

Note

Even when view restrictions are set, an area outside the view restriction may still be displayed momentarily when the camera is

controlled near the boundary of the view restriction.

[Camera] > [Restrict View]

Setting View Restriction

R13

R12

M50

The following settings can be configured here.

• Restrict View

View restriction

Recording outside the view restriction

is not possible.

128

Configuring View Restrictions

Set a restrict view area and click [Apply] to restrict the capture range of the Camera Viewer.

Note

To delete view restriction settings, select [Disable], and click [Apply].

Operate the camera angle in the video display area to get the positioning value, and specify the restrict view

area.

[Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit]

Operate the camera angle to the upper limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit to set in the video display area.

Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the pan/tilt preview frame.

Click [Preview] in [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit] to move the preview frame to the upper

limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit of the current pan/tilt preview frame, respectively, and display it in the

video display area.

Note

In the following cases, (warning icon) will be displayed with a message stating that the restrict view area cannot be

configured, and you will become unable to set view restrictions.

• For [Left Limit]/[Right Limit]: If [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] (P. 109) is set to [Enable]

• For [Upper Limit]: If [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] (P. 109) is set to [Enable], and [Camera] > [Installation

Conditions] > [Image Flip] (P. 111) is also set to [Enable]

• For [Lower Limit]: If [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] (P. 109) is set to [Enable], and [Camera] > [Installation

Conditions] > [Image Flip] (P. 111) is set to [Disable]

To set the upper limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit, set [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] (P. 109) to

[Disable].

[Telephoto]/[Wide-angle]

Operate the camera angle to the wide-angle/telephoto limit to set in the video display area.

Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the wide-angle preview frame/telephoto preview frame.

Click [Preview] in [Telephoto]/[Wide-angle] to move the preview frame to the telephoto/wide-angle limit of the

current wide-angle preview frame/telephoto preview frame and display it in the video display area.

You can also set the telephoto/wide-angle limit range by directly moving the operation knob on the zoom slider up

and down. This also moves the preview frame to the telephoto/wide-angle limit of the current wide-angle preview

Important

• If you have changed how the camera is installed, reconfigure the view restriction settings.

• Check view restrictions again if you change the [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings on the Setting Page.

• When [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] or [Image Stabilizer] are changed in the setting page, check the view

restriction settings again.

Select [Enable] in [View Restrictions].

Use the video display area to configure the view restrictions.

R12

R13

Setting Page

129

frame/telephoto preview frame and displays it in the video display area.

If you dragged the telephoto knob to the upper limit and the wide-angle knob to the lower limit, the view restriction

is disabled for each edge (there is no restriction).

Four types of frames are displayed for panorama images.

Drag these frames on the panorama screen to set the restrict view area.

(1) Pan/Tilt Preview Frame (Red Frame)

Displays the vertical and horizontal range the camera can move. You can directly change the restrict view

area by dragging the pan/tilt preview frame.

If you dragged the pan/tilt preview frame to the outer frame of the panorama area, the view restriction is

disabled for each edge (there is no restriction).

Note

If [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] (P. 109) is set to [Enable], sides of the pan/tilt preview frame that cannot be

configured become gray and cannot be changed. For information on the relationship between Auto Flip and configuring

the restricted view area, please refer to “Note” on P. 128.

(2) Wide-Angle Preview Frame (Green Frame)

Indicates the maximum wide-angle view possible within the pan/tilt preview frame. You can directly change

the position of the frame by dragging the telephoto preview frame, but the aspect ratio cannot be changed.

(3) Telephoto Preview Frame (Yellow Frame)

Indicates the maximum telephoto view possible within the wide-angle preview frame. You can directly

change the position of the frame by dragging the telephoto preview frame, but the aspect ratio cannot be

changed.

(4) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)

Indicates the current position displayed in the video display area.

Note

• If the preview frame (blue frame) is positioned outside the pan/tilt preview frame (red frame) you have changed, the

camera position is moved inside the restricted view.

• If you change the position of the wide-angle/telephoto preview frame, the wide-angle/telephoto end of the preview

frame is also changed.

The settings are saved to the camera.

Click [Apply].

View Restriction Operation Knob (Telephoto)

View Restriction Operation Knob (Wide-angle)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

M50

R12

R13

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

R12R13

130

Note

• The panorama screen may be slightly different from the actual image. After you have configured view restrictions, be sure to use

the Camera Viewer to confirm they have been reflected correctly. View restrictions are not applied to the video display area of the

restrict view setting.

• The controllable range and range that can be captured are as follows.

• The pan and tilt ranges vary depending on the zoom ratio (view angle).

• If the view restriction will be exceeded as a result of zooming toward wide-angle, the camera will first pan and tilt to a position

where the maximum wide-angle zoom will be within the viewing restriction area. Wide-angle zoom control will then be enabled

within the view restriction area.

• Narrowing the view restriction may also reduce the zoom range.

Tilt Control Range

Pan Control Range

Maximum Horizontal Capture Range

Maximum Wide-angle Viewing Angle

Maximum Vertical Capture Range

Setting view restrictions

automatically restricts

the camera operating

angle.

When using wide-angle, the camera

operating angle would allow capture outside

the view restrictions if the angle remained the

same. Therefore, it is narrowed automatically.

Restricted view angle

Camera operating angle

Captured video range

Camera

Zoom

out

Captured video

Restricted view angle

Zoom

out

First, the center of the

maximum wide-angle

zoom is panned and

tilted.

After panning and

tilting, wide-angle

zoom control is

enabled within the

view restriction.

Setting Page

131

By registering settings as presets, such as camera angles, camera settings (e.g. exposure) and Day/Night Mode switching,

the presets can be easily called up by Viewers to apply the settings.

Using Presets

In addition to immediate execution of registered camera angles and the camera settings such as exposure when

operating the viewer, you can use presets as follows.

• Execute the presets during switches between Day Mode and Night Mode (P. 199).

• Automatically cycle through multiple presets at a set time and in a predetermined sequence. (Preset Tour) (P. 134)

• When using the Intelligent Function, lock the monitoring position at a preset camera angle (P. 175).

Registering a Preset

The camera angle and camera settings can be registered as a preset.

The number of presets you can register are as follows.

• Maximum 257 presets (including the home position).

• Maximum 65 presets (including the home position).

• Maximum 21 presets (including the home position).

[Camera] > [Preset]

Registering Presets

Important

• It is strongly recommended you register as presets, the positions Intelligent Function will use for the camera.

• If you use a preset registered with the digital zoom, the camera position at registration may not be able to be reproduced with a high

degree of accuracy. Therefore, it is recommended that you use a preset registered in the optical zoom area for the preset tour and

intelligent function.

• Reconfigure the presets if you change the [Camera] > [Camera] > [Installation Conditions] > [Image Flip] (P. 111) settings on the

Setting Page.

• Reconfigure the presets if you change [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] (P. 104) settings in the Setting Page.

• If you change the settings in [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] in the Setting Page (P. 108), the angle of view when

using the camera will not match the angle of view when you configured presets. If you change [Image Stabilizer] settings, recheck the

preset settings.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Camera Settings

• Preset Registration

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12 M50

R13 R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

H652 H651

132

The camera angle can also be operated from the following screens.

Panorama screen

Digital PTZ panel

Set the items to apply in the preset. For a description of each item, please refer to “Camera Settings” (P. 113).

[Pan/Tilt/Zoom position] /[Digital PTZ Position]

Select [Register] to register the current camera angle as a preset.

Note

If you selected [Home] (home position) in the preset list, [Pan/Tilt/Zoom position]/[Digital PTZ Position] is always registered.

[Camera Settings]

Select [Register] to register the current camera settings as a preset.

[Preset Name]

Operate the panorama image to set the angle you want to register as the preset.

Click [Camera Settings] to set the items as necessary.

Set the items of preset registration.

R13 R12

M50

H652

H651

M50

R12

R13

Video Display Area Panorama Screen

Preview Frame

H651H652

Video Display Area Digital PTZ Panel

Preview Frame

R13

R12

M50

H652 H651

Setting Page

133

Enter a preset name. Be sure to enter a preset name in [Preset Name (alphanumeric characters)].

[Show in Viewers]

Select [Enable] to allow the Camera Viewers to use the preset.

Note

If the preset position is outside the restrict view area, (a warning icon) is displayed on the left.

The preset is saved in the camera.

Note

Click [Clear] to discard the settings and restore the settings saved in the camera. However, note that presets only registered to the

preset list by clicking [Register] are all discarded.

Deleting a Preset

Select the preset to delete in the preset list, and click [Delete]. Click [Apply] to delete the preset from the camera.

[Home] (home position) cannot be deleted.

Previewing a Preset

Select a preset in the preset list, and click [Preview]. The preset settings are displayed in the video display area.

Checking Advanced Preset Information

Displays the information of the presets registered in the camera.

Select the preset to check the advanced information from the preset list, and click [Show Detailed Information].

Check the detailed information, and click [OK].

Click [Register].

To register multiple presets, repeat steps 1 – 4.

Click [Apply].

134

You can have the camera automatically tour multiple registered presets to allow monitoring.

Note

• Preset tour is not performed while the camera control privileges are obtained in the Camera Viewer or the video is displayed in the

Setting Page.

• Preset tour is not performed when control privileges are obtained by RM-Lite.

Screen Composition

The screen composition differs according to the camera model, because the number of tour routes that can be registered,

number of presets that can be toured with a single route, and tour conditions differ.

[Camera] > [Preset Tour]

Setting the Preset Tour Route

Important

• If you set frequent pan/tilt operations in a preset tour, the life expectancy of the pan/tilt drive part may become shorter. The life

expectancy may become even shorter in environments outside ordinary temperatures (approx. 23°C (73°F) and approx. 60%

humidity).

You can reduce the frequency of pan/tilt operations by setting a longer stop time at each tour point, or by specifying an active time for

the preset tour to reduce operation time.

• Intelligent Function cannot be used while using preset tour.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Route List

• Edit Tour Route

M50R12R13

Setting Page

135

(1) [Route List]

The list of preset tour routes. Displays the tour conditions that are set. Up to five tour routes can be set.

(2) Tour Condition Settings

Set the conditions for touring and the tour route name (P. 136).

(3) Preset Tour List

Displays a list of the presets to tour. The presets are toured from the top of the list.

You can change the order of the presets and set the time to stop at the preset positions, etc.

(4) Video Display Area

Displays the current camera video.

(5) Panorama Screen

Displays the panorama images registered in the camera.

M50R12R13

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(3)

H651

H652

(2)

(4)

(6)

(3)

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

136

(a) Pan/Tilt Preview Frame (Red Frame)

Displays the vertical and horizontal range the camera can move. Displayed when the restricted view is set

(P. 127).

(b) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)

Indicates the current trim position in the video display area.

Indicates the preset/home position that is currently selected.

(6) Digital PTZ Panel

Displays the full video obtained by the camera when starting [Preset Tour].

(b) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)

Indicates the current camera angle in the video display area

Indicates the preset/home position that is currently selected.

Tour Route Settings

The number of tour routes you can register and the number of presets that can be toured per route are as follows.

• Maximum 5 routes, maximum 64 presets per route.

• Maximum 1 route, maximum 20 presets per route.

Note

If the effective conditions or active times of the registered tour routes conflict, the routes listed higher in the [Route List] take precedence.

[Effective Conditions]

Select the conditions to preform a preset tour.

[Not used]

Preset tour is not performed.

[Viewers Connected]

Preset tour is performed when a Viewer is connected to the camera.

(a)

(b)

(c)

H652 H651

(b)

(c)

R13 R12 M50

H652

H651

M50R12

R13

Select the tour route to configure from [Route List].

Specify Settings for Tour Route Names and Usage

R13 R12 M50

Setting Page

137

[Always]

Preset tour is always performed.

Note

When [Not used] is selected, the following preset tour route settings cannot be configured.

[Route Name (alphanumeric characters)]

Enter the tour route name.

[Specify Active Time]

Select [Specified] to configure a preset tour at a predetermined time, and enter the start time and end time for the

preset tour.

If [Viewers Connected] is set for [Effective Conditions], the preset tour operates when the Viewer is connected to

the camera at the tour start time. If [Always] is set for [Effective Conditions], the preset tour always operates.

[Reverse Route]

If you select [Enable], the preset tour order in [Edit Tour Route] will be reversed.

You can select multiple presets.

Note

If the position for the preset is outside the view restriction range, (warning icon) will be displayed on the left.

The preset is added to the [Edit Tour Route].

Select a preset in [Edit Tour Route] and click the [ ] or [ ] to change its position in the list.

If you select a preset in [Edit Tour Route] and then click [Delete], the preset will be deleted.

Select a preview name in the [Preset List] or [Edit Tour Route] list, and click [Preview]. The preset settings can be

checked in the video display area.

Click [Add] in [Edit Tour Route].

Select a preset to tour from the [Preset List].

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12 M50

Click [Add].

M50R12R13

138

Note

If a preset has already been added to [Edit Tour Route] and is selected when another preset is added from the [Select Preset] list,

the added preset will be displayed below the selected preset.

Select the preset to configure in [Edit Tour Route] and set the tour operation.

[Speed (PT)]

Select the camera pan/tilt speed for moving to the next preset.

[Speed (Z)]

Select the camera zoom speed for moving to the next preset.

[Pause (sec)]

Enter the time the camera pauses at the preset position.

Note

If you want to view video during moves between presets, select a slow speed. If you only want to switch quickly to view video at the

preset positions, select a fast speed.

Click [Apply] after configuring the route. The setting will be saved to the camera.

Note

Click [Clear] to set the route again. The settings saved in the camera are restored. However, note that presets only added to the

[Edit Tour Route] by clicking [Add] are all discarded.

Configure the preset speed and pause duration.

Click [Apply].

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12 M50

M50

R12

R13

Setting Page

139

Reduces the size of transmitted H.264 video by reducing the video quality of non-target areas, such as ceilings and the sky.

ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size Reduction.

Note

• The image quality of the specified area depends on the [Bit Rate Control] setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)].

– When [Use bit rate control] is set: The image quality is adjusted according to the situation to match the target bit rate.

– When [Do not use bit rate control] is set: The setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] is retained.

• The image quality for areas outside the specified area will be reduced according to [Data Size Reduction Level].

• Even if the camera pans, tilts, or zooms, the specified area follows the movement of the camera.

• Specified areas can only be configured within view restrictions.

Specified Area

Specify the area where video quality is not to be lowered.

You can specify up to eight areas with different colored frames.

[Video and Audio] > [ADSR]

Reducing Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific

Areas

Important

Some image scenes and settings for selected areas may not be able to reduce data size using ADSR. Please test the ADSR feature in the

environment before use.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Specified Area

•ADSR

R13 R12

M50

140

If you select [Enable] for the area with the frame color you would like to use for the specified area, the frame will be

displayed on the Viewer.

Set the specified area as follows within the display area.

• Drag out a frame and move it to the area you want to specify.

• Change the size of the frame by dragging any of the eight handles (■).

• If you want to change the camera angle, use the pan/tilt/zoom sliders.

Note

If you change the camera angle before operating the area frame, the area frame may become hidden. To display the area frame again,

either click the [Preview] button for the target specified area, or use the slider to move the camera angle to a position in which the entire

area frame is displayed.

[Preview]

The camera will move to a specified area if you click [Preview] for that area.

Note

You can use the Camera Viewer to check video with ADSR settings applied. Video outside the specified area will deteriorate according to

the amount of applied data reduction.

ADSR

Set whether H.264(1) and H.264(2) will lower video quality outside areas set with [Specified Area].

[Enable in H.264(1)]

Select [Enable] to lower video quality of outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(1) video.

[Enable in H.264(2)]

Select [Enable] to lower video quality of outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(2) video.

[Data Size Reduction Level]

Set the data size reduction level for the outside area of [Specified Area]. If you select [Low], the data size reduction effect is

lower. If you select [High], the data size reduction effect is higher.

Important

• If you change the [Image Flip] setting in [Camera] > [Installation Conditions], review the specified area settings.

• Reconfigure the specified area if you change the [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings.

• Configure the specified area to a slightly larger size.

• Specified areas may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.

• The selected area can only be set within the optical zoom range, and cannot be set using the digital zoom range (P. 68).

R13 R12

M50

R13 R12 M50

M50R12

R13

R12

M50

Setting Page

141

Displays the date and time, camera name and other text on the Viewer.

Note

• Depending on video quality settings, the on-screen display may become difficult to decipher. Set it after confirming appearance on

actual video

• When using digital PTZ, on-screen display will not be displayed if the cropped video has a horizontal size of 384 pixels or

less.

On-Screen Display

[Date display]

Select whether to display the date on the Viewer.

[Position of date display]

Select position for date display on the Viewer.

[Format of date display]

Select the year, month and day display order.

[Time display]

Select whether to display the time on the Viewer.

[Position of time display]

Select position for time display on the Viewer.

[Text display]

Select the text strings to display on the Viewer.

[Display designated string]

Displays the text string entered in [Text string display] below.

[Display camera name]

Displays the camera name entered in [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)] (P. 108).

[Position of text display]

Select position for text display on the Viewer.

[Text string display]

If [Text display] is set to [Display designated string], enter the text string to be displayed in alphanumeric characters.

[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]

Displaying Date, Time and Text on the Viewer

Important

The on-screen time display is not suitable for usage where high reliability is required. Only use it as reference information on systems

where utmost and constant reliability is required for surveillance.

The following settings can be configured here.

• On-screen display

M50

H652

H651

142

[Color of text]

Select from eight colors for the text color.

[Background color]

Select from eight colors for the background color.

[Color depth of text and background]

Select a color depth combination (Filling, Transparence, Translucence) for the text and background color.

Setting Page

143

Mask any areas of the camera video. You can check the camera video and set up to eight privacy masks.

When the camera is panned, tilted, or zoomed, the privacy mask areas follow the camera video.

Registering Privacy Masks

Use the mouse to position and size the privacy mask areas, then save the settings to the camera.

Use the sliders to operate the camera angle. In addition, you can perform the following operations while the

mouse operation switch button is purple after clicking it.

– Centering the camera angle to the position you click in the video display area

– Area zoom operations (P. 69)

[Video and Audio] > [Privacy Mask]

Setting Privacy Mask

Important

• Privacy masks are applied to all video transmitted from the camera (live video, uploaded video, recorded video and video recorded to

a memory card).

• Privacy masks are not available in the following situations.

– When the camera is launched immediately after being turned on.

– For camera video in the camera angle settings

– While a panorama image is being created.

• Intelligent Function detection also works in the privacy mask areas. The [Intelligence Function] Setting Page displays the profile line of

detected objects, etc., so you may be able to tell the movement of subjects even if a mask is applied.

The following settings can be configured here.

•Privacy Mask

• Mask area

• All privacy masks

H651

R13

R12

M50

Display the area which you want to add as a mask area on the video display area.

R13 R12

M50

M50R12

R13

144

The preview frame attached with the area number is displayed on the video display area. The privacy mask area

for the corresponding number is also displayed on the privacy mask registration area.

Drag the preview frame displayed in the video display area to the position you want to mask.

Change the size of the preview frame by dragging the handles () positioned on its four sides.

The settings for the privacy mask area is enabled.

Set [Mask area] to [Disable] to temporarily disable a privacy mask area without deleting it. The disabled privacy

mask area of the registration area will be displayed with a crossed out frame.

The color selected here is reflected to all the preview frames and privacy mask areas.

You can save up to eight privacy masks.

The privacy mask area is saved to the camera.

Saved privacy mask areas are shown in the video display area and the privacy mask registration area.

In [Add mask area], click [Add].

Set the size and position for the preview frame in the video display area.

Important

Set the privacy mask area to a slightly larger size than the area you want to hide.

Set [Mask area] to [Enable].

Change the color for the privacy mask area with [Color] as necessary.

To add privacy mask areas, repeat steps 1 to 5.

Click [Apply].

Preview Frame

Privacy Mask Registration Area

Area Number

Privacy Mask Area

M50

R12

R13

Setting Page

145

Changing/Deleting a Privacy Mask

Privacy Mask Registration Area

This shows the positions of privacy mask areas in the entire area that can be captured by the camera.

(1) Entire Area That Camera Can Capture

This shows the area that can physically be captured.

If a panorama image is registered in the camera, the panorama image is displayed here.

(2) View Restriction Area

Appears in gray if view restrictions have been configured (P. 127).

(3) Privacy Mask Areas

Privacy mask areas with [Mask area] set to [Enable] (P. 144) are filled in.

Privacy mask areas with [Mask area] set to [Disable] (P. 144) have diagonal lines displayed in them.

(4) Preview Frame

Indicates the current position of the camera displayed in the video display area.

Changing Mask Position and Size

How to Select a Privacy Mask

The following methods are available for selecting the privacy mask area.

• Click the privacy mask area you want to change in the privacy mask registration area.

• Click [Preview] in the mask area you want to display.

• Click the privacy mark area displayed in the video display area.

Important

• Check privacy mask settings again if you change the [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings.

• You will need to set the position of the privacy mask again if you change the [Image Flip] setting in [Camera] > [Camera] >

[Installation Conditions].

• If you reconfigure privacy mask settings after you changed the [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer],

reconfigure all privacy mask positions and sizes.

• After registering a privacy mask, pan, tilt and zoom the camera to confirm the areas you want to mask do not become visible

when the camera direction is altered.

• Privacy masks may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.

• If you change the privacy mask settings after saving a panorama image using the panorama function, you must use the

panorama function to recreate the panorama image (P. 123).

R13

R12 M50

(1)(1)

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

(4)

(3)

(2)

(3)

R13 R12

M50

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

Select the privacy mask area you want to change.

Change the position and size of the privacy mask area.

146

Move the preview frame by dragging it and change its size by dragging the handles () positioned on its four

sides.

Note

To discard changes and restore settings saved to the camera, click [Clear]. However, note that mask area settings that have not

been saved in the camera by clicking [Apply] are all discarded.

The changed privacy mask area is saved to the camera.

Deleting a Privacy Mask from the Camera

Click [Delete] for [Mask area] in the privacy mask that you want to delete, then click [Apply].

The selected privacy mask area is deleted from the camera.

Click [Apply].

Setting Page

147

Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to the camera and audio output from the Viewer. The output sound

clip used when an event is triggered can also be registered.

General Sound

Set the audio input/output volume, echo cancellation and microphone type.

[Input Volume]

Enter the input volume from the microphone connected to the camera.

This is applied when [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] (P. 153) is set to [Enable].

[Output Volume]

Enter the output volume from the Viewer to the speaker connected to the camera.

This is applied when [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] (P. 153) is set to [Enable].

[Echo Canceller]

Select to enable or disable the Echo Canceller for suppressing echoes that occur between the microphone and speaker.

This is applied when [Server] > [Audio Server] (P. 153) is set to the following.

• [Audio Transmission from the Camera] is set to [Enable]

• [Audio Reception from Viewer] is set to [Enable]

[Video and Audio] > [Audio]

Setting Audio Input/Output

Important

• Video and audio can be distributed to up to 30 clients. However, when there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over

an SSL/TLS connection, the video frame rate may slow down and the sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is

enabled.

• The video and audio may not be synchronized.

• If the [Input Volume] or [Echo Canceller] setting is changed after setting volume detection (P. 164) or scream detection (P. 165), check

the detection setting again.

• The audio may be temporarily interrupted, depending on the performance of the computer and the network environment.

• The audio may be interrupted if anti-virus software is enabled.

• Communication may be temporarily interrupted, cutting off the audio, if the LAN cable is unplugged and plugged in again. If this

occurs, reconnect from the Viewer.

• The volume, sound quality, etc., may change depending on the characteristics of the microphone used.

• Use a speaker with an amplifier to connect to the camera (please refer to “Installation Guide”).

Important

Use of the Echo Canceller may affect audio quality and volume. Use it when necessary to suit the installation environment and camera

usage.

R13

M50

H652

H651

The following settings can be configured here.

• General Sound

• Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3

148

[Audio Input]

Select the type of microphone connected to the camera.

Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3

You can upload up to three sound clips for playback when an event is triggered.

Note

The sound clip is used when audio playback is set in [Event] > [External Device Input] (P. 161) or [Event] > [Intelligent Function] > the

[Event] tab (P. 197).

[Browse File]

Specify the sound clip to upload and click [Add].

To be able to upload a sound clip, it must satisfy the following requirements.

• Playback length: Less than 20 seconds.

• File Format: “.wav” (µ-law PCM 8bit. Sampling frequency 8000 Hz, monaural)

A sample sound clip is included on the Setup CD-ROM in the SOUND folder.

If it is blank when you click [Apply], the sound clip registered in the camera will be deleted.

To delete an uploaded sound clip, click [Delete] next to the name of the sound clip.

[Sound Clip Name]

Enter the name of the sound clip to upload.

Be sure to enter the sound clip name.

Caution

If using a microphone, switch [Line In] and [Microphone In] (P. 148) with [Audio Input] to suit the specifications of the

microphone.

Using the wrong input may damage the camera and/or microphone. Be sure to configure settings correctly.

Setting Page

149

Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage or WS-Security time checks.

HTTP Server

Set the authentication method and HTTP port number.

[Authentication Method]

Select an authentication method for use by the HTTP server.

[HTTP Port]

Enter an HTTP port number.

Normally use [80] (factory default setting).

[HTTPS Port]

Enter an HTTPS port number.

Normally use [443] (factory default setting).

SNMP Server

Configure the necessary settings to use SNMP.

Note

• The camera information referenced from the SNMP manager is read-only.

• Use an SNMP Manager that supports SNMP MIB2 (supporting RFC1213).

[Use SNMP v1 and v2c]

If you select [Enable], you can use SNMP v1 and v2c to browse the camera information from an SNMP manager.

[Use SNMP v3]

If you select [Enable], you can use SNMP v3 to browse the camera information from an SNMP manager.

[Server] > [Server]

HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings

Important

If the setting of [HTTP Port] or [HTTPS Port] is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a

confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click [OK] to apply the new setting.

If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will be

displayed in a message.

If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.

The following settings can be configured here.

• HTTP Server

• SNMP Server

• SNMP v1 and v2c Server

• SNMP v3 Server

• FTP Server

• WS-Security

150

[Administrator Contact Information]

Enter contact information (e-mail address, etc.) for the administrator of the camera. Setting information can be referenced

by the SNMP manager.

[Administration Function Name]

Enter the camera name used for administration. Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.

If left blank, the camera model name will be used.

[Installation Location]

Enter information regarding the installation location of this camera. Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP

manager.

SNMP v1 and v2c Server

[Community Name]

If you select [Enable] for [Use SNMP v1 and v2c], enter the community name to use for SNMPv1 and v2c. The factory

default setting is blank.

SNMP v3 Server

[User Name]

If you selected [Enable] for [Use SNMP v3], set the user name to use with SNMP v3.

[Security Level]

Select the security level to use for SNMP v3.

[Authentication Algorithm]

If you selected [Authentication but no encryption] or [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], select the

authentication algorithm.

[Authentication Password]

If you selected [Authentication but no encryption] or [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], set the

authentication password.

[Encryption Algorithm]

If you selected [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], select the encryption algorithm.

[Encryption Password]

If you selected [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], set the encryption password.

FTP Server

[Use FTP Server]

The settings for using an FTP server.

[User Name]

Set the name of the user to allow FTP connections for.

[Password]

Set the password of the user to allow FTP connections for.

Important

• Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of FTP software.

• When changing the user name, make sure to also change the password.

• If you set the same user name as a user name used in the system, the message “User name is invalid.” is displayed. In this case, set

another user name.

Setting Page

151

WS-Security

[Check Time on Authentication]

Select whether to check the time information of data transmitted by the client.

152

Settings for clients that can connect to a video server.

Video Server

[Maximum Number of Clients]

Enter the maximum number of clients that can be connected to the camera at the same time.

If set to [0], only administrators will be able to connect.

[Camera Control Queue Length]

Enter the maximum queue length for clients requesting camera control privileges from the Camera Viewer.

If set to [0], only administrators can queue for camera control.

[Maximum Connection Time (sec.)]

Enter the maximum time in seconds during which an individual client can connect to the camera.

If set to [0], the connection time is unlimited.

[Camera Control Time (sec.)]

Enter the maximum time Camera Viewer can retain camera control privileges.

[Server] > [Video Server]

Video Transmission Settings

Important

When there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over an SSL/TLS connection, the video frame rate may slow down and

the sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is enabled.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Video Server

R13 M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

153

Settings for audio transmission from the camera to the computer, and audio reception from the computer to the camera.

Audio Server

[Audio Transmission from the Camera]

Select to transmit audio from the microphone connected to the camera to the Viewer.

[Voice Activity Detection]

Select whether to detect when there is no sound coming from the microphone.

When set to [Enable], audio data transmission will pause while there is no sound input from the camera. This can reduce the

load on the network used.

[Audio Reception from Viewer]

Select to receive audio from Camera Viewer and RM Viewer.

Received audio can be output from a speaker with an amplifier connected to the camera.

[Server] > [Audio Server]

Audio Transmission/Reception Settings

R13

M50

H652

H651

The following settings can be configured here.

•Audio Server

Network

154

Set the video and audio transmission using RTP.

RTP Server

Enable RTP, and set the RTSP authentication method and port number.

[RTP]

Select this to enable or disable RTP.

[RTSP Authentication Method]

Select an authentication method for RTSP. Since the RTSP authentication method is configured independently of the HTTP

authentication method, you need to configure each authentication method.

[RTSP Port]

Enter the RTSP port number.

Normally use [554] (factory default setting).

Audio Multicast

Set multicast for audio transmission.

[Multicast Address]

Enter the multicast address for audio transmission as follows.

IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8

Set IPv4 to [0.0.0.0] and IPv6 to [::0 (::)] to disable multicast.

[Multicast Port]

Enter the multicast port number for audio transmission.

If set to [0], multicast is disabled.

[Multicast TTL]

Enter the effective range for multicast transmission.

If set to [0], multicast is disabled.

The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal

passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.

For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the

router to be transmitted.

[Server] > [RTP Server]

RTP Settings

The following settings can be configured here.

• RTP Server

• Audio Multicast

• RTP Streaming 1 to 5

R13

M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

155

RTP Streaming 1 to 5

You can set each stream for RTP stream transmission in an RTP Streaming 1 to RTP Streaming 5 session.

[Video Size]

Select the video format (JPEG or H.264) and video size for the RTP stream.

The video sizes for JPEG will vary depending on the [Video Size Set] settings (P. 104).

The video sizes for H.264 will be determined according to the [H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] settings in [Video] (P. 105).

In addition, [H.264(2)] cannot be set for multiple RTP streams.

[Frame Rate]

Enter the frame rate if the RTP stream is JPEG video.

This cannot be set for H.264 video. The [Frame Rate] setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] will be used.

[Multicast Address]

Enter the multicast address for RTP streaming as follows.

IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8

Enter [0.0.0.0] for IPv4 and [::0(::)] for IPv6 to disable multicast.

[Multicast Port]

Enter the multicast port number for RTP streaming.

If set to [0], multicast is disabled.

[Multicast TTL]

Enter the effective range for multicast transmission of RTP streams.

If set to [0], multicast is disabled.

The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal

passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.

For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the

router to be transmitted.

[Audio Transmission]

Select whether to use audio transmission for RTP streaming.

Note

• RTP Streaming URL

rtsp://Address:Port Number/rtpstream/config1(to 5)=r|u|m

[=r|u|m] is optional and can be omitted. If specified, specify only one option.

r: Requests RTP over TCP

u: Requests RTP over UDP

m: Requests multicast

Example: RTP Streaming 1 request using RTP over TCP

rtsp://192.168.100.1:554/rtpstream/config1=r

Caution: Note that the actual operation is dependent on the RTP client application, so the URL does not necessarily specify the method

used for transmission.

• When H.264 is selected, bit rate control and video quality are each set with [Video] (P. 105).

• The [Video Distribution] and [Audio Distribution] settings in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority] are not used for RTP.

• RTP streaming video may not be viewable on systems using a proxy server or firewall. If this occurs, contact your system administrator.

• If Host Access Restrictions are applied to a client while it is streaming using RTP over UDP, it may take from a few to tens of seconds

until streaming ceases.

• Regardless of the [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] setting, RTP streaming audio will be used.

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

156

Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an event is triggered.

Use [Server] > [Server] (P. 149) to configure HTTP server and FTP server settings for uploading.

Video Record Setting

When an event is triggered, you can set whether to upload camera video with HTTP or FTP or to record the video to a

memory card.

This item can also be set with the [Memory Card] submenu (P. 215) and will be reflected in [Video Record Setting] here.

[Video Record Action]

Select [Upload] to upload video.

General Upload

Set the upload method and video format for upload.

[Video Record] > [Upload]

HTTP and FTP Upload Settings

Important

• When using the upload function or recording to a memory card, the following settings are required according to each event.

– [Video Record] settings configured with [Event] > [Timer].

– [Video Record] settings configured with each of the [Event] > [External Device], [Audio Detection] and [Linked Events].

– The setting in the [Event] tab of the Intelligent Function (P. 197).

• When using the upload function, or recording to the memory card, do not change the settings in the [Setting Page]. Doing so may

result in the upload function or the recording to memory card to stop.

• If you are using either HTTP or FTP upload together with e-mail notification by text and video, set [Video] > [JPEG] > [Video Size:

Upload / Memory card] (P. 105) to a small size.

• HTTP upload does not support SSL/TLS.

• If the camera is set to upload or send e-mail notification continuously, not all video or e-mails may be sent depending on the video size

and the network condition to the server. If this occurs, a message is written to the log (P. 222).

• If the destination for HTTP or FTP upload, or e-mail notification is set for a Windows operating system, IPsec communication is not

supported.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Video Record Setting

• General Upload

• HTTP Upload

• FTP Upload

R13

M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

157

[Upload]

Select whether to upload with HTTP or FTP.

[Video Format]

Select the video format for upload.

Video size and quality of the uploaded video follow the settings in [Video] (P. 104).

[Frame Rate]

Enter the maximum frame rate of video to be uploaded when [Video Format] is set to [JPEG].

[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)

Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.

Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video

Format].

[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)

Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.

Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video

Format].

Note

If the server or network load increases due to the upload settings, the video frame rate may drop. If this occurs, reconfigure the following

settings to reduce the size and frequency of uploaded data.

• Set a lower value for [Video Size: Upload / Memory card] for [JPEG] (P. 105).

• Reduce the number of frames or seconds in [Pre-event Buffer] or [Post-event Buffer].

• If [Volume Detection Event] is enabled, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Ongoing ON Event Operation] (P. 164).

• From the Intelligent Function [Event] tab, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Detected mode Operation] (P. 197).

• If [External Device Input Event] is enabled, disable [Active Event Operation], [Inactive Event Operation] or [Ongoing Active Event

Operation] (P. 162).

• If [Timer Event] is enabled, increase the value in [Repeat Interval] (P. 167).

HTTP Upload

Settings for the HTTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [HTTP Upload].

The HTTP upload function sends notifications via HTTP or via HTTP with attached images, depending on the network

camera event.

For information about the HTTP upload function and settings, contact your nearest Canon Customer Service Center.

[Notification]

Select whether to send event information notifications only or notifications with attached videos when using HTTP upload.

[URI]

Enter the HTTP server URI to which to upload.

[User Name], [Password]

Enter the user name and password required for authentication.

Digest authentication is not supported.

[Proxy Server]

If using a proxy server, enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server.

Important

For H.264(1) or H.264(2), the following settings must be configured in [Video] > [H.264(1)] (P. 105) or [H.264(2)] (P. 106).

– [Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control]

– [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less

– [I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]

Important

The maximum video buffer size capacity is approx. 56 MB. If a large video size is set, the Frame Rate, Pre-event Buffer and Post-event

Buffer may not be achieved as specified.

If buffering cannot be achieved as specified, a message is written to the log (P. 222). Confirm that no messages are displayed in the log.

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

158

[Proxy Port]

If using a proxy server, enter the port number of the proxy server.

[Proxy User Name], [Proxy Password]

Enter to use a user name and password for the proxy server.

Digest authentication is not supported.

[Parameter (query string)]

Enter the request parameters.

Parameters can be specified using the “%” character (P. 226).

[HTTP Upload Test]

Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.

Only a single JPEG image will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,

first click [Exec], then click [Apply].

FTP Upload

Settings for the FTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [FTP Upload].

[Notification]

This is set to [Video data upload with FTP].

[FTP Server]

Enter the host name or IP address of FTP server.

[User Name], [Password]

Enter the user name and password required for authentication.

[PASV Mode]

Select whether to use PASV mode when connecting to an FTP server.

[File Upload Path]

Enter a remote path (directory name) for video files to be uploaded to.

[File Naming]

Select a file naming rule for the upload file.

[YYYYMMDDHHMMSSms]

Video is uploaded according to the file name format of “{year}{month}{day}{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.

(Example: 20160123112122000.jpg)

[YYYYMMDD Directory/HHMMSSms]

A subdirectory named “{year}{month}{day}” is created first, and then the video is uploaded using the file name

“{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.

(Example: 20160123/112122000.jpg)

[Loop]

Video is loaded with a file name numbered in sequence from 0000 up to the value set in [Maximum Number of Loops].

(Example: 0000.jpg, 0001.jpg) The number will return to 0000 when the maximum number of loops is reached.

Since the way FTP servers manage the upload of files with existing file names differs as follows, be sure to check the FTP

server specifications before configuring this setting.

• Overwrite the existing file name

• Automatically save the file with a different name

• Generate an error

[Maximum Number of Loops]

If [Loop] is set under [File Naming], enter the maximum number of loops.

[User Setting]

Video is uploaded according to the file naming method specified in [Subdirectory Name to Create] and [File Name to

Create].

Important

Enter [Proxy Server], [Proxy Port], [Proxy User Name] and [Proxy Password] if connecting via a proxy server.

Setting Page

159

[Subdirectory Name to Create], [File Name to Create]

If file naming is set to [User Setting], enter the subdirectory name to be created as well as the name of the created file.

Parameters can be specified in the entry with the “%” character (P. 226).

[FTP Upload Test]

Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.

Only a single JPEG will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,

first click [Exec], then click [Apply].

160

Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified recipient when an event is triggered.

E-mail Notification

Set the mail server to be used for e-mail notifications and the content of the e-mail to be sent.

[Notification]

[Subject] and [Message Body] are text.

If you set [Text with Image], an image (JPEG format) captured immediately before the event will be attached.

[Copy E-mail Settings]

Copy the e-mail settings used in [Maintenance] > [Log] > [Log Notifications] (P. 222). However, the password is not copied.

[Mail Server Name]

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

[Mail Server Port]

Enter the port number for the SMTP server.

[Sender (From)]

Enter the e-mail address of the sender.

[Recipient (To)]

Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.

[Authentication]

Select an authentication method suited to the destination SMTP server.

[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]

Enter the user name and password needed for authentication, and the POP server host name or IP address when e-mail

authentication is set to [POP before SMTP].

[User Name], [Password]

Enter the user name and password needed for authentication when e-mail authentication is set to [SMTP-AUTH].

[Subject]

Enter the subject of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.

[Message Body]

Enter the message body (text) of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.

Parameters can be specified in the text using the “%” character (P. 226).

[E-mail Notification Test]

Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test based on the settings currently entered.

It is not necessary to click [Apply]. After entering a password, first click [Exec], then click [Apply].

[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]

Setting E-mail Notification

The following settings can be configured here.

• E-mail Notification

Setting Page

161

Operation settings for external device output and for external device input triggered events.

External Device Output 1, 2

Set the operation for output to the external device.

The camera has two external device outputs. You can set the output for each of them.

Note

The output for an external device can be switched between active and inactive with [External Device Output] of the Camera Viewer (P. 84).

[Operation Mode]

Select whether the output terminals are normally open or closed.

If you set [Normally Open], an active event occurs when the output terminal connection closes, and an inactive event

occurs when the output terminal connection opens.

If you set [Normally Close], an active event occurs when the output terminal connection opens, and an inactive event

occurs when the output terminal connection closes.

[Active Output Format]

Select the output format when the external device output is active.

[Pulse Output Time (sec)]

Enter the output duration time (sec.) when [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse].

[Event] > [External Device]

External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings

Important

When [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse] and a timer is used (P. 167), contact output is controlled only once when the timer starts.

R13

M50

H652 H651

The following settings can be configured here.

• External Device Output 1, 2

• External Device Input

• External Device Input 1, 2

Normally Open

Active Event Status

Inactive Event Status

1 (The contact is closed.)

0 (The contact is open.)

Normally Close

Inactive Event Status

Active Event Status

1 (The contact is closed.)

0 (The contact is open.)

162

External Device Input

[External Device Input Event]

Select whether to use the input from an external device, such as a connected sensor, as an event.

External Device Input 1, 2

You can set the operation to be performed when an event is triggered by input from an external device.

The camera has two external device inputs. You can set the input for each of them.

You can set these if you have selected [Enable] in [External Device Input Event].

Note

An icon in the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer will indicate when there is an external device input event (P.84).

[Operation Mode]

Select the circuit condition to suit the signal input from the connected external device.

When [Normally Open] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device close, and an inactive event

occurs when the terminals open.

When [Normally Close] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device open, and an inactive event

occurs when the terminals close.

[Active Event Operation]

Select the operation to be performed when an active event is triggered.

If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when an

active event is triggered.

[Inactive Event Operation]

Select the operation to be performed when an inactive event is triggered.

If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when an

inactive event is completed.

[Ongoing Active Event Operation]

Select the operation to be performed during an active event. This can only be set when [Active Event Operation] is set to

[Enable].

If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the active

event.

[Preset]

If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when an external device input event

is triggered.

It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

[Video Record]

Select whether to record video depending on the event.

If you select [Enable] and an external device input event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination

specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 156).

[E-mail Notification]

Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the event.

If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification will be performed when an external device input event is triggered.

To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160) beforehand.

[External Device Output for Active Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an active event is triggered.

[External Device Output for Inactive Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an inactive event is triggered.

[Audio Playback at Active Event]

If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at active events for the external device input.

Important

When the camera is moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera control privileges are released, even if the user

has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.

R13

M50

M50R13

Setting Page

163

[Audio Playback at Inactive Event]

If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at inactive events for the external device input.

[Sound Clip]

Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at Active Event] or [Audio Playback at Inactive Event] has been set to

[Enable].

You must register the sound clip with [Video and Audio] > [Audio] (P. 148) beforehand.

[Volume]

Enter the volume for the sound clip.

[Switch Day/Night]

Select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when an external device input event is triggered.

When [Switch to Day Mode] is set, switches to Day Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Night Mode

when an inactive event is triggered.

When [Switch to Night Mode] is set, switches to Night Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Day Mode

when an inactive event is triggered.

Important

• When [Camera] > [Initial Setting] > [Day/Night] is set to [Auto] (P. 118), [Switch Day/Night] will not happen when an external device

input event is triggered.

• When the [Switch Day/Night] settings switch Day/Night Mode, camera control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained

those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.

164

Audio input from the microphone connected to the camera, such as loud noises or screams, or when expected audio input

ceases, can trigger operations such as video recording or e-mail notification.

Note

You can check the audio detection status on the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer (P. 85).

Volume Detection

A volume detection event will be triggered when audio input volume is detected exceeding or falling below the reference

volume setting.

Set the conditions for triggering a volume detection event and the operations to perform according to an event.

[Volume Detection Event]

Select whether to use volume detection event.

[Detect Criteria]

Select the criteria for triggering a volume detection event.

[Reference Volume Level]

Enter the reference sound level to be used for detection.

Set the reference volume level by performing an actual test while checking [Current Volume Level] before configuring the

setting.

[Current Volume Level]

The current volume level is displayed on the status bar.

The level set in [Reference Volume Level] is indicated by a red mark. Volume below the reference level is displayed in blue,

that above the reference level is displayed in red.

[Detect Criteria Duration (sec)]

When the status meeting the volume detection criteria has continued for the specified duration or longer, an ON event is

triggered.

[Event] > [Audio Detection]

Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings

Important

For notes on use of audio detection, please refer to “Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Included Software” (P. 9) in “Safety

Precautions”.

Important

Volume detection is temporarily disabled when an event causes the playback of a sound clip or when audio is transmitted from the

Viewer.

R13

M50

H652 H651

The following settings can be configured here.

• Volume Detection

• Scream Detection

Setting Page

165

[ON Event Operation]

If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a

volume detection event (ON event) is triggered.

[OFF Event Operation]

If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a

volume detection event (OFF event) is completed.

[Ongoing ON Event Operation]

Select the operation to be performed when an ON event is triggered. This can be set when [ON Event Operation] is set to

[Enable].

If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the

volume detection event.

[Preset]

If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a volume detection event is

triggered.

It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

[Video Record]

Select whether to record video depending on the volume detection event.

If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination

specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 156).

[E-mail Notification]

Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the volume detection event.

If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.

To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160) beforehand.

[External Device Output for ON Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.

[External Device Output for OFF Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an OFF event is triggered.

Scream Detection

A scream detection event is triggered when sounds from someone, such as a scream or cry, are detected.

You can also set the operations to perform depending on the scream detection event.

[Scream Detection Event]

Select whether to use scream detection event.

[ON Event Operation]

If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a

scream detection event (ON event) is triggered.

[Preset]

If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a scream detection event is

triggered.

Important

When the camera is triggered by a volume detection event and moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera

control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera

control applications.

Important

• Scream detection detects abnormal sound in relatively quiet environments. Detection is difficult in noisy environments.

• The scream detection is not a voice recognition function.

• Detection may be difficult if an excessively loud scream is input.

• Detection may be difficult if the duration of the scream is short.

• Detection may be temporarily difficult if the same sound is input repeatedly multiple times.

R13

M50

M50R13

R13

M50

166

It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

[Video Record]

Select whether to record video depending on the scream detection event.

If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination

specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 156).

[E-mail Notification]

Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the scream detection event.

If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.

To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160) beforehand.

[External Device Output for ON Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.

Important

When the camera is triggered by a scream detection event and moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera

control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera

control applications.

M50R13

Setting Page

167

The timer function can generate events that can trigger operations, such as video recording and e-mail notifications, at

regular intervals.

You can set the following two types of timers.

• 24 hours continuous from specified time

• Within specified time only

Either type can be set to trigger timer events at regular intervals.

Timer 1 to 4

You can register up to four timer events.

[Timer Event]

Select whether to use a timer event.

[24-Hour Continuous Setting]

When set to [Enable], the timer event will be repeated at the interval in [Repeat Interval] for 24 hours, starting from the time

specified in [Start Time].

When set to [Enable], only [Video Record] operations can be performed.

[Start Time]

Enter the start time of the timer event in 24-hour format. The timer event will be triggered at the start time.

[End Time]

When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], enter the end time for repeating the timer event in the 24-hour format.

The timer event will be triggered at the end time.

[Repeat Interval]

Select a repeat interval for timer events. The timer event will be triggered at the selected intervals.

Operation

Set the operations to be performed when timer events are triggered.

[Start Time Preset]

When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable] and you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to

the preset location at the time set in [Start Time].

It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

[Event] > [Timer]

Timer Triggered Operation Settings

Important

When the camera is moved to a preset position specified in the [Start Time Preset] settings, camera control privileges are released, even

if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Timer 1 to 4

•Operation

R13

R12

M50

M50R12R13

168

[Video Record]

Select whether to record video depending on the timer event.

If you select [Enable] and a timer event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified in

[Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 156).

[E-mail Notification]

When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the timer

event.

If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification is performed when a timer event is triggered.

To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160) beforehand.

[External Device Output]

When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], set whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive at

[Start Time] and [End Time] of a timer.

[Repeat Interval] is not supported.

[Switch Day/Night]

When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when a timer event is

triggered. This can only be set with [Timer 1].

Select [Switch to Day Mode] to switch to Day Mode at the start time, and Night Mode at the end time.

Select [Switch to Night Mode] to switch to Night Mode at the start time, and Day Mode at the end time.

[Repeat Interval] is not supported.

Important

• If you set [Start Time] and [End Time] and select a preset with [Start Time Preset], the Day/Night setting in [Camera] > [Preset] >

[Camera Settings] > [Day/Night] (P. 131) is given priority. Therefore, even if you set [Switch Day/Night] to [Switch to Day Mode] or

[Switch to Night Mode], the [Switch Day/Night] setting will be disabled if the opposite setting has been configured in [Preset] >

[Camera Settings].

• When [Day/Night] in [Camera] > [Initial Setting] is set to [Auto] (P. 118), [Switch Day/Night] will not happen when a timer event is

triggered.

• When the [Switch Day/Night] settings switch Day/Night Mode, camera control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained

those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

R12

M50

Setting Page

169

Intelligent Function

The Intelligent Function records video, sends e-mail notifications, plays audio and starts other operations when it detects

changes in the video due to subject movement.

The Intelligent Function has the following modes.

• Video Detection

• Auto Tracking

•Audio Detection

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Overview -

R13

R12

R13

M50

H652

H651

Notes on Use of This Camera

The Intelligent Function is not suitable for applications where high reliability is required. If constant and maximum reliability

is required for surveillance it is not recommended that you use this function. Canon shall assume no liability for any

accident, loss or other undesirable outcomes resulting from Intelligent Function operations.

Camera Viewer

RM Viewer

Camera

E-mail Notification

Network

Video Recording on

Storage Server

Upload to FTP

Server/HTTP

Server

Audio Detection

Moving Object Detection

Removed Object

Detection

Abandoned Object

Detection

Passing

Detection

Camera Tampering Detection

Auto TrackingIntrusion Detection

170

Video Detection

Detects changes to video in a specified area. There are six types of detection to suit your needs.

Moving Object Detection

Detects moving objects. This function can be used to detect visitors or suspicious individuals.

Moving object detection is triggered while moving objects are inside the detection area.

Abandoned Object Detection

Detect objects that are carried in and abandoned for a certain duration. This function can be used to detect

suspicious objects that have been left behind. Abandoned object detection is triggered when an object is left in the

detection area for a specified duration.

Removed Object Detection

Detect objects that have been removed. This can be used to detect actions such as the taking away of valuables.

Removed object detection is triggered when an object is removed from the detection area for a specified duration.

Background Video Generated

Moving object enters/leaves area

Change in Designated Area Analysis Moving Object Detected

Detection begins when a

moving object enters the

designated area.

Detected

Background Video Generated

Object abandoned

Change in Designated Area Analysis Abandoned Object Detected

The object is abandoned

and detection begins after

specified duration.

Detected

Background Video Generated

Removing an object

Change in Designated Area Analysis Object Removal Detected

The picture (object) is

removed and detection

begins after a specified

duration.

Detected

Setting Page

171

Camera Tampering Detection

Detect when capture is being disrupted. This can be used to detect when the camera orientation is changed or the

video display is obscured with spray, etc. Camera tampering detection is triggered when an area exceeding a

specified ratio of change is continuously altered.

Passing Detection

Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified line.

This determines that an object is passing when the decision point of the object detection frame crosses a detection

line.

Background Video

Generated

Tampering

Video Changes Analysis Camera Tampering

Detected

Detection begins when the ratio

of change in a video exceeds a

specified amount.

Detected

Background Video

Generated

Passing

Video Changes

Analysis

Passing Detected

Detection begins when the

decision point crosses the

specified detection line.

Detected

Decision Point

Detection

Frame

172

Intrusion Detection

Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified area. This can be used to detect actions such as when

someone climbs over a barrier and enters a restricted area in a museum, etc. This determines that an object is entering

when the decision point of the object detection frame enters the detection area and the specified duration has elapsed.

Auto Tracking

The camera automatically tracks an object when it is detected moving in a detection area. This allows monitoring

movement, such as of suspicious persons.

Audio Detection

Detects audio input to the camera. There are two types of detection.

These are set with [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 164), not with [Intelligent Function].

[Volume Detection]: Detects when volume level exceeds or falls below a reference volume.

[Scream Detection]: Detects screams or cries from people.

Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations

• When setting the Intelligent Function, do an actual detection test to confirm that detection will be performed correctly.

• If a sudden change in lightness or darkness occurs within the entire screen, proper detection may not be possible for up

to five minutes.

• When the image is zoomed in (telephoto), detection may not work as expected.

• Detection will not be performed while the Intelligent Function is restarting.

• If the camera is operated while configuring or using the Intelligent Function, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.]

is shown and the Intelligent Function will restart.

• If the display switches between Day mode and Night mode, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.] is shown and

intelligent function will restart.

Background Video

Generated

Intrusion

Video Changes Analysis Intrusion

Detected

Detection begins when the

decision point enters the

detection area.

Detected

Decision

Point

Detection

Frame

R13

R12

Tracking

Background Video

Generated

Analysis Auto TrackingVideo Changes

R13

M50

H652

H651

Setting Page

173

• If [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings on the Setting Page are changed, be sure to change the

preset position settings ( ) and Intelligent Function settings, and check operations. The Intelligent

Function may not operate, depending on the settings.

• Please set the Intelligent Function again if the angle of view has changed through camera operation, or the preset/home

position has changed.

• If [Status] in [Detection Setting List] has [Enabled] when the camera position is fixed, control privileges cannot be

obtained by the Camera Viewer or RM Viewer. Also, the preset tour will no longer run.

• If you use a preset registered with the digital zoom, the camera position at registration may not be able to be reproduced

with a high degree of accuracy. Therefore, it is recommended that you use a preset registered in the optical zoom area

for the intelligent function.

Difficult-to-Detect Subjects

The following subjects may not be detected, or may result in erroneous detection.

• Objects or areas where there is little contrast in color or brightness with the background may not be detected.

• Small objects and changes on the screen may not be detected.

• Partial or entire changes in brightness on the screen may trigger detection.

• When there are multiple overlapping objects, there may be a change in detection. For example, objects passing

may either not be detected or the timing of detection may be incorrect.

• When there are large numbers of objects in the scene, objects may not be properly detected.

Registering Presets

It is strongly recommended that you register the camera angle as a preset in advance and lock the camera to that position

when using video detection. It is also recommended that the field of view that captures targeted objects at a larger ratio be

used.

For details on preset registration, please refer to “[Camera] > [Preset] Registering Presets” (P. 131).

Selecting the Intelligent Function Operation Mode

Video detection and auto tracking cannot be used simultaneously. You can select which one to use on the Setting Page for

the intelligent function.

Note

The applied settings are retained even if you change operation modes.

The currently selected operation mode changes to purple.

R13 R12 M50

R13 R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

Select [Video Detection] or [Auto Tracking].

Important

[Video Detection] and [Auto Tracking] are exclusive of each other. Only the selected mode operates, the other is disabled.

In addition, if you change to the other operation mode without clicking [Apply], settings changed in the current mode are lost. Be

sure to click [Apply] to save the changed settings.

Read the displayed message, and click [OK] or [Cancel].

174

For [Video Detection], please refer to “[Event] > [Intelligent Function] - Video Detection -” (P. 175) to configure

video detection settings.

For [Auto Tracking], please refer to “[Event] > [Intelligent Function] - Auto Tracking -” (P. 192) to configure Auto

Tracking settings.

Set the Selected Operation Mode

Setting Page

175

In video detection, select the type to detect, and set the tracking area for video changes while checking images on the

camera. You should also set which operations (e-mail notification, record video, playing audio from the speaker connected

to the camera) should be carried out when changes are detected.

Steps for Configuring Video Detection

Set an area where changes in video are detected and an area where changes in video are not detected (non-detection

area) as necessary.

Configuring the Detection Area

The following are the basic steps for configuring a detection area. For details on settings for each type of detection,

please refer to “Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab)” (P. 179).

For details on how to adjust presets, please refer to “[Camera] > [Preset] Registering Presets” (P. 131).

Note

You can select presets that meet the following conditions.

– Presets configured within the view restrictions.

– Presets with pan, tilt and zoom setting values (not blank) configured in the [Preset Registration]. (P. 132)

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Video Detection -

The following settings can be configured here.

•Operation Mode

• Detection Settings (List)

• Non-detection Area Settings (List)

• Display Options

• Camera Position Settings

• Detection Settings (Details)

• Non-detection Area Settings (Details)

Select [Lock camera position] in [Camera Position Settings], then select a preset.

R13

R12

M50

176

Note

You can register up to 15 detection settings.

The detection settings added to [Detection Settings] are displayed and [Enable these detection settings] is

selected.

Note

• To disable the detection settings, clear the [Enable these detection settings] checkbox.

• Enter the [Detection Settings Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)] if necessary (P. 180).

• To delete detection area settings, select the detection area settings to delete and click [Delete] in Detection Settings (List).

Set criteria in the video display area or [Detection Criteria] tab (P. 179). The detection criteria differ according to

Click [Add] in [Detection Settings].

Select [Detection Setting Number] (1 to 15) and [Detection Type] for the detection setting to be added.

Click [OK].

Configure the detection criteria.

Setting Page

177

the detection type.

Set which operations to carry out for video detection in the [Event] tab (P. 197).

The settings are saved to the camera.

Note

To restore settings, click [Clear] before applying. This discards the settings you have specified and restores the settings saved in

the camera. However, note that detection settings only added to the detection setting area by clicking [Add] are all discarded.

You can check the detection status of the specified detection settings in video display area, the [Event] column in

[Detection Settings] or the [Event and Input/Output] menu in the Camera Viewer (P. 84).

Setting a Non-Detection Area

You can set an area where changes are not detected, to prevent mis-detection and non-detection.

Configure event settings.

To register multiple detection settings, repeat steps 2 to 6.

Click [Apply].

Check the detection result.

Important

• The non-detection area set in the non-detection area settings is reflected in all detection settings.

• If the area in the detection settings and the area in the non-detection area settings overlap, the non-detection settings are

prioritized.

178

The non-detection area settings added in [Non-detection Area Settings] are displayed and [Enable non-detection

area] is selected.

Note

• Up to five non-detection area settings can be registered.

• To disable non-detection area settings, clear the [Enable non-detection area] checkbox.

• To delete non-detection area settings, select the non-detection area settings to delete and click [Delete] in Non-detection Area

Settings (List).

Click the mouse to create a polygon. For information on the creation method, please refer to “Using [Polygonal]”

(P. 180).

Click [Non-detection Area Settings] to display the list of non-detection area settings.

Click [Add].

Set a non-detection area in the video display area.

Setting Page

179

Note

• You can create a polygonal area with a maximum of 32 vertices. You cannot set a non-detection area with only a straight line.

• Click [Clear Area] to set the non-detection area again.

• Enter [Non-detection Area Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)] as necessary.

• The non-detection area is displayed in the video display area in black. The display color cannot be selected.

The settings are saved in the camera.

Note

Click [Clear] to discard the settings and restore the settings saved in the camera. However, note that non-detection areas only

added to the non-detection areas by clicking [Add] are all discarded.

The status of the specified non-detection settings can be checked in the video display area and the [Status]

column in [Non-detection Area Settings].

If [Enable non-detection area] is cleared, [Disabled] is displayed for the [Status] column in [Non-detection Area

Settings], and the non-detection area is not displayed in the video display area.

Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab)

Detection criteria is controlled and set in the video display area for each type of detection.

To register multiple non-detection areas, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Click [Apply].

Check the detection result.

Important

• Make sure to check the video display area to see whether the detection area and non-detection area are unintentionally

overlapped.

• If you set the detection area and non-detection area close to each other, detection may be performed incorrectly.

Important

It is recommended that you configure the detection criteria in conditions as close as possible to the actual conditions in which you will

use the camera.

180

Settings Common to Each Detection Type

(1) [Detection Settings Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)]

Enter a detection name. Be sure to enter a name in [Detection Settings Name].

(2) [Area Shape]

Configure whether the detection area is a rectangle or a free-shape polygon.

Note

You cannot select [Area Shape] for camera tampering detection.

Using [Rectangular]

Configure the detection area by moving, resizing or changing the shape of the rectangle that is displayed in the

video display area.

Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.

Using [Polygonal]

Click the video display area to place a vertex for the polygon at the clicked position.

Place the vertices in order, then either click the first vertex again or double-click the last vertex to set the polygon

detection area.

Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.

You can specify polygonal areas with a maximum of 32 vertices.

Note

If you change the shape of a detection area you have already configured, the area is deleted and you switch to configuring a new

area.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Setting Page

181

[Clear Area]

The detection area configured with [Polygonal] is deleted.

(3) [Display Color]

Select the color for detection areas and detection lines.

How to Configure Moving Object Detection

Set the area you want to detect a moving object in as a detection area.

This determines how large the moving object must be in relation to the detection area you set in step 2 for motion

detection to be triggered.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is displayed for one

second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.

Detection Status for Moving Object Detection

All moving objects detected are shown with profile lines.

If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its profile lines are white.

If the moving object is larger than [Object Size (%)], its profile lines take on the same color as the detection area

indicating “detected” status has been triggered.

Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].

In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect moving objects (P. 180).

Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].

Object Size Indicator

Detection Area

Profile Lines of Detected Moving Object

182

Note

If an object is placed in or removed from the moving object detection area, “detected” status will be triggered for Moving Object

Detection.

How to Configure Abandoned Object Detection

Set the area you want to detect an abandoned object in as a detection area.

This determines how large the abandoned object must be in the detection area you set in step 2 to detect as an

abandoned object.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is displayed for one

second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while setting.

Detection Status for Abandoned Object Detection

All moving objects detected are shown with profile lines.

If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not met, profile lines are white.

If both [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are exceeded, the profile lines take on the same color as the detection

area, indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.

Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].

In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect abandoned objects (P. 180).

Configure the size of the object needed for detection in [Object Size (%)].

Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to be detected as an abandoned object.

Object Size Indicator

Detection Area

Setting Page

183

How to Configure Removed Object Detection

Set an area around the target objects, for Removed Object Detection. The following methods are available for

configuring removed object detection.

– Setting a broad area for detecting the removal of objects

– Specifying the profile lines of objects for removal detection

If you cannot detect the intended objects using one of these methods, use the other method.

Setting a Broad Area for Detecting Removed Objects

Configure the following settings with the [Specify a profile and detect] checkbox cleared.

Set how large an object that is removed must be to trigger removed object detection in the detection area set in

step 2.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is displayed for one

second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.

A removed object is detected when the setting value in [Object Size (%)] is exceeded.

Profile lines of detected abandoned object

Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].

In the video display area, draw a broad area to detect removed objects (P. 180).

Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].

Set detection area

184

Specifying the Profile Lines of Objects for Removal Detection

Temporarily remove the target object for removed object detection from the video display area.

▼

Click [Restart intelligent function] (P. 198).

The background image is generated

▼

Return the target object to its original position.

▼

Click [Automatic Profile Settings].

A profile line of the object is drawn using a polygon with up to 32 vertices.

If there are multiple objects detected, the profile lines are drawn around the object occupying the largest area.

▼

Configure [Duration (Sec)] for time required for an object to be detected as a removed object.

Click [Apply].

Important

• A removed object may not be detected in the following cases.

– When long and thin objects are removed

– When the same object is placed continuously and some of the objects are removed

– When objects of the same shape are placed together and some of the objects are removed

• If the video inside the detection area changes without an object being removed, it may be misdetected as a removed object.

Select [Specify a profile and detect].

Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].

Use the video display area to configure an area along the profile lines of the object you do not want removed

(P. 180).

Alternatively, set the profile lines automatically using the following procedure.

Set detection area

Setting Page

185

Click [Restart intelligent function] again.

Detection Status for Removed Object Detection

All moving objects detected are shown with profile lines.

If you set [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)], the following occurs.

– If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not met, the profile line is displayed with a white line.

– If both [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are exceeded, the profile line is displayed in the same color as

the detection area to indicate that something has been detected.

If removed object detection is set in [Specify a profile and detect], the following occurs.

– As long as [Duration (Sec)] is not exceeded, profile lines are white.

– When [Duration (Sec)] is exceeded, profile lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that an

object has been removed.

How to Configure Camera Tampering Detection

For [Camera Tampering Detection], the entire video display area is the detection area. The area cannot be changed.

In [Change Ratio (%)], you can set the ratio of screen change for the entire video display area to determine as

tampering detection.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the ratio of the entire video display area is

displayed for one second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check while specifying the setting.

Important

Set detection areas so that they precisely match the profile lines of the target object. Influence from the target object’s shadow or

adjacent objects may result in the target object being recognized as larger than it actually is and may not trigger removed object

detection. If this occurs, reconfigure the detection area to outline the recognized target object.

Follow steps 4–5 in “Setting a Broad Area for Detecting Removed Objects” (P. 184).

Profile lines of detected removed object

186

Detection Status for Camera Tampering Detection

Moving objects detected are shown with profile lines.

If an object is smaller than [Change Ratio (%)], its profile lines are white.

If the obscured area in the video exceeds [Change Ratio (%)], profile lines take on the same color as the detection

area, indicating that the camera has “detected” tampering.

Note

Detection will not be possible for three seconds after the change ratio for camera tampering detection is changed, or when

switching to camera tampering detection settings from settings for another detection mode.

How to Configure Passing Detection

The detection line for passing moving objects is determined by setting the passing direction and object decision

point.

In the video display area, click the start point of the detection line.

▼

Click another point.

The passing detection line will be set between the start point and next point you clicked.

Change Ratio indicator

Profile lines of detected tampered object

Follow the steps below to configure the passing detection line in the video display area.

Setting Page

187

▼

To configure a polygonal detection line, click the vertices of the line in order.

You can configure a polygonal detection line with a maximum of 32 vertices.

▼

Click any of the set vertices.

The detection line is determined.

Note

• Even after configuring a detection line, you can drag each vertex to change the shape of the detection line and the lines between

vertices to move the entire detection line.

• Click [Clear Line] to delete a detection line.

If a moving object crosses the detection line in the selected direction, it will be detected as ‘passed’.

A preview display shows the selected passing direction on the detection line in the video display area.

If the selected decision point crosses the detection line, it will be detected as ‘passed’.

The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.

Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.

If the moving object exceeds the set value for [Object Size (%)], it will be targeted for passing detection.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is displayed for one

second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.

In [Passing Direction], select the direction for moving objects to pass the detection line.

In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering passing detection when the

moving object crosses a detection line.

Configure the size of the moving object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].

Detection line

Passing direction (both directions)

Detection Frame

Decision point (bottom center)

Detection line

188

Note

A ratio of up to 30% can be set in [Object Size (%)] for passing detection.

Detection Status for Passing Detection

All moving objects detected are shown with white profile lines.

When the [Decision Point] of a moving object that meets the [Object Size (%)] setting crosses a detection line in the

direction specified in [Passing Direction], the profile line changes to the same color as the detection line, and the

status becomes “detected”.

Notification of a passing detection event occurs only when the decision line is crossed. Take care in setting the

operation to be performed when an event occurs.

How to Configure Intrusion Detection

Set the area for which you want to detect intrusions.

The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.

Important

Perform a detection test after configuring passing detection to make sure the detection frame of a moving object continues to be

displayed.

Object Size Indicator

In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect intruding objects (P. 180).

Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to enter a detection area, and be detected as an

intrusion.

In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering intrusion detection when the

moving object enters a detection area.

Setting Page

189

Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.

When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is displayed for one

second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.

Detection Status for Intrusion Detection

All moving objects detected are shown with profile lines.

When [Decision Point] of a moving object larger than [Object Size (%)] enters a detection area and exceeds

[Duration (Sec)], its profile lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that “detected” mode has

been triggered.

Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)

Set operations to be performed upon detection of changes in a subject.

For details on settings, please refer to “Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)” (P. 197).

Checking Event Status

If the intelligent function (moving object detection, abandoned object detection, removed object detection, camera

tampering detection, passing detection, and intrusion detection) detects something, the event icon in that row turns green.

The detection status of auto tracking can also be checked in the Event and Input/Output menu of the Camera Viewer

(P. 84).

Configure the size of the moving object needed to trigger detection in [Object Size (%)].

Important

After the Intrusion Detection is set, please confirm that the system continues to show profile lines of the detected moving object.

Detection Frame

Decision point (bottom center)

Object Size Indicator

Detection Area

Profile Lines of Detected Moving Object

190

No.1: Video Detection Status is ON

No.2 and 3: Video Detection Status is OFF

Displaying Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Non-Detection

Area and Detection Results (Display Options)

Configure the detection area/line, non-detection area, and detection results displayed in the video display area.

You can select the following for either [Detection Area/Line] or [Detection Results].

[Selected Detection Settings Only]

Show the detection areas/lines or detection results only for those detection settings selected in Detection Settings

(List).

[All Detection Settings]

Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for all detection settings in Detection Settings (List).

[Detection Settings of the Same Type]

Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for the same types of detection settings as those selected in

Detection Settings (List).

[Do not display]

No detection areas/lines or detection results are shown.

The following settings can be selected for [Non-Detection Area].

[Only selected non-detection areas]

Only the non-detection areas selected in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are displayed.

[All non-detection areas]

All the non-detection areas in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are displayed.

[Only enabled non-detection areas]

Only the non-detection areas with [Enable non-detection area] selected in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are

displayed.

[Do not display]

No non-detection areas are displayed.

Reducing Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings)

The Intelligent Function may not work when the entire screen is exposed to sudden changes in brightness, for example,

when indoor lights are turned on or off. Changing the detection settings may reduce this effect.

Setting Page

191

The settings are saved and the Intelligent Function restarts.

Context Menu

Right-click on the video display area, Detection Settings (List) and Non-Detection Settings (List) to display a menu that

allows you to use the following functions. Unavailable functions will be grayed out when you right-click.

[Copy detection area/line]

Copy the detection area/line of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.

[Paste detection area/line]

Paste the copied detection area/line from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Paste cannot be used

with camera tampering detection.

Pasting a detection line is possible only when setting passing detection in the copy source and the paste target.

[Clear detection area/line]

Delete the detection area/line of the selected detection setting. If the shape of the area is rectangular, or the area is a

camera tampering detection area, the area cannot be deleted.

[Copy detection criteria settings]

Copy the detection criteria of the selected detection setting to the clipboard. The detection settings name and display color

are not copied.

[Paste detection criteria settings]

Paste the copied detection criteria from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Pasting is possible only if

the source and the target are the same detection type.

[Copy event settings]

Copy the event settings of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.

[Paste event settings]

Paste the copied event settings from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured.

[Copy non-detection area]

Copies a non-detection area that has been set to the clipboard.

[Paste non-detection area]

Pastes a non-detection area copied to the clipboard to the non-detection area that is being set.

[Clear non-detection area]

Deletes the non-detection area that is being set.

Click [Detection Settings].

Select [Reduce effects of lighting change] checkbox.

Click [Save settings].

Important

• It takes several seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.

• Settings in [Reduce effects of lighting change] may not work depending on the operating environment. Repeated sudden

changes in brightness may also have the same effect. Perform a detection test to check whether settings work correctly.

192

For Auto Tracking, set the detection area for moving objects while checking the video on the computer screen. The camera

is controlled so that the detected moving object appears near the center of the video display area. You can also set which

operations (such as e-mail notification, recording video, or playing audio from the speaker connected to the camera) are

carried out when detection occurs.

Setting Auto Tracking

Use the following steps to set Auto Tracking.

For details on how to adjust presets, please refer to “Registering a Preset” (P. 131).

If you select [Specify the initial camera position], the camera angle will be moved to the selected preset position.

The camera angle will also be moved to the selected preset position after Auto Tracking ends.

Note

You can select presets that meet the following conditions.

– Presets configured within the view restrictions.

– Presets with pan, tilt and zoom setting values (not blank) configured in [Preset Registration] (P. 132).

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Auto Tracking -

R13

R12

The following settings can be configured here.

•Operation Mode

• Display Options

• Camera Position Settings

Obtain camera control privileges to set Auto Tracking (P. 67).

Select [Specify the initial camera position] in [Camera Position Settings] as necessary, then select a preset.

Important

It is recommended that you select [Specify the initial camera position] and configure the camera to begin auto tracking from a

specified position.

Setting Page

193

Use a rectangle to specify the detection area (P. 180).

Note

The detection area is set to display within a rectangular area by default. It cannot be set to the edge of the video display area.

Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.

When the setting values or slider is changed, or the detection area is changed, an indicator representing the

object size is displayed for one second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio

while specifying the setting.

When the moving object is detected, the camera automatically tracks it for the specified time.

When selected, the camera zooms in on the moving object and automatically tracks it.

Configure the detection area in the video display area.

Configure the size the moving object needed to trigger detection in [Object Size (%)] in the [Tracking Conditions]

tab.

To configure the time to continue auto tracking, select [Set the tracking duration] and set the time in [Tracking

Duration (Sec)].

To automatically zoom in on the moving object while tracking, select [Enable auto zoom during tracking].

Object Size Indicator

Detection Area

194

For details on settings, please refer to “Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)” (P. 197).

The settings are saved to the camera.

If you keep control privileges, the camera does not automatically track.

For the camera to automatically track moving objects, it is necessary to release control privileges.

Detection Status for Auto Tracking

All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.

If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines are white.

If the moving object is larger than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines take on the same color as the detection area,

indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.

In “detected” mode, auto tracking starts and a polygon frame appears on the target object.

The camera will pan, tilt or zoom during auto tracking so the target object always appears at the center of the screen.

When [Enable auto zoom during tracking] is selected, the camera zooms in on the target and auto tracks.

In the [Event] tab, configure the operations to be performed when “detected” mode is triggered.

Click [Apply].

In the message box displayed, click [OK].

Contour Lines of Detected Moving Object

Detection Area

Setting Page

195

Auto tracking prioritizes tracking the first detected moving object. While auto tracking, other moving objects will not

be detected even if they satisfy [Tracking Start Conditions].

Note

The detection status of auto tracking can also be checked in the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer (P. 85).

Auto Tracking Termination

Auto tracking will be terminated in the following cases.

• The Camera Viewer, etc. obtained camera control privileges or the video is displayed on the Setting Page.

• The camera moved to a preset position due to the triggering of a volume detection event or an external input device.

• Capture of a panorama image has started.

• You executed [Maintenance] > [General] > [Tool] > [Refresh Drive System].

• The configured auto [Tracking Duration] time has elapsed.

• Tracking cannot continue because sight of the moving object was lost (examples: movement of target object was lost,

target object is lost in shadow of another object, target object falls below the sizes possible for tracking, target object

moves outside the possible tracking area).

• The [Intelligent Function] has restarted.

When auto tracking is terminated, a tracking OFF event is triggered and the camera returns to the initial camera position

(when [Specify the initial camera position] has been selected). If camera control privileges were revoked, the camera will

move after camera control privileges are released.

Auto tracking detection resumes after the camera moves back to the original position.

Disabling Auto Tracking

You can disable Auto Tracking by selecting [Video Detection] (P. 173) in [Operation Mode] for the Intelligent Function.

Important

• When setting the Auto Tracking Function, it is recommended that you test the auto detection, to confirm that object will continue

to be tracked.

• Moving objects are not individually recognized during auto tracking. Thus when two objects pass each other, or there are

multiple moving objects, proper tracking of the object may not be possible.

• If there are multiple moving objects, large objects closest to the center of the screen are prioritized and will continue to be

tracked.

• The privacy mask areas are also part of the auto tracking detection area.

• The camera will not track the subject while video is being displayed on the Setting Page, or while camera control privileges are

obtained using the camera viewer, etc. To allow automatic tracking with the camera, you must release the camera control

privileges.

• While auto tracking, preset tours will not start.

• Auto tracking beyond view restrictions is not possible.

Auto Tracking Target Frame

R13

196

Displaying Settings for Detection Areas and Detection Results

(Display Options)

Select whether to display the detection area and detection results in the video display area.

You can select [Display]/[Do not display] for both [Detection Area] and [Detection Results].

[Detection Area] can only be displayed when you have obtained camera control privileges.

Setting Page

197

This explains functions common to both video detection and auto tracking.

Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)

Set operations to be performed upon detection of changes in a subject.

(1) Specify Operation Timing (Multiple Selections Possible)

[ON Event Operation]

When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed when the mode becomes “detected”.

[OFF Event Operation]

When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed when “detected” mode ends.

[Detected mode Operation]

When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed while “detected” mode is active.

[Action During Auto Tracking]

When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed while the moving object is automatically tracked.

(2) Specify Event Operation (Multiple Selections Possible)

[E-mail Notification]

When selected, e-mail notification is sent according to the timing set in (1). [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] in the

Setting Page must be set in advance (P. 160).

[Video Record]

When selected, video recording begins according to the timing specified in (1). [Video Record] > [Upload] (P. 156) or

[Memory Card] > [Video Record Setting] (P. 215) in the Setting Page must be set in advance.

(3) Specify Audio Playback Timing

[Audio Playback at ON Event]

When selected, the sound clip specified in (4) is played back when the mode becomes “detected”.

[Audio Playback at OFF Event]

When selected, the sound clip specified in (4) is played back when “detected” mode ends.

(4) Sound Clip Settings

[Event] > [Intelligent Function]

- Shared Operations -

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)

Video Detection Auto Tracking

R13 R12

R13

R12

R13 M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

198

[Sound Clip Name]

Select the sound clip to be played back. You must register the sound clip with Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3 in [Video and

Audio] > [Audio] (P. 148) on the Setting Page in advance.

[Volume]

Set the volume for the sound clip.

(5) External Device Output Operations

[External Device Output for ON Event]

Select this to start or pause output to an external device when the mode becomes “detected”, and to select the output

destination (output 1 or 2) and operation (active or inactive).

[External Device Output for OFF Event]

Select this to start or pause output to an external device when “detected” mode ends, and to select the output

destination (output 1 or 2) and operation (active or inactive).

Restarting Intelligent Function

If the background video has changed while you were specifying settings or detection results are not as specified, restart

the Intelligent Function.

R13

M50

H652

H651

If you have not yet obtained the camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges]

button and obtain the control privileges.

Click [Restart intelligent function].

Important

It takes several tens of seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.

Setting Page

199

When events trigger the switching of Day/Night Mode, presets registered in advance can be executed, such as changing

the camera angle or video quality settings.

Day/Night Mode Switching

[Preset when Switching to Day Mode]

Executes the preset when switched to Day Mode.

[Preset when Switching to Night Mode]

Executes the preset when switched to Night Mode.

Note

• It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

• You can set the timing for event-triggered Day/Night Mode switching in [Switch Day/Night] in [External Device Input] (P. 162) or [Timer]

(P. 167).

[Event] > [Switch Day/Night]

Executing Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode

Important

When the user has camera control privileges, the presets for [Preset when Switching to Day mode] and [Preset when Switching to Night

Mode] will not run.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Switch Day/Night

200

By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered. Select AND/OR for the event linking method.

You can set the operations to perform, such as recording video or sending e-mail notifications, when a linked event is

triggered.

Note

You can check the linked event status on the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer (P. 85).

Linked Event 1 to 4

You can register up to four linked events.

You can link five types of events: [Volume Detection], [Scream Detection], [External Device Input], [Timer] and [Intelligent

Function].

[Linked Event]

Select whether to use a linked event.

[Event Linking Method]

Select the event linking conditions.

[AND]: A new linked event is triggered if both event types selected with [Event 1] and [Event 2] are triggered. Set [Event

Order] and [Event Gap] for this.

[OR]: A new linked event is triggered if either event type selected with [Event 1] and [Event 2] is triggered.

[Event Order]

You can select the order two events must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].

If set to [None], the order will not be considered.

[Event Gap (seconds)]

Enter the interval between two events that must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].

A new linked event is triggered if the second event triggers within the specified interval after the first event was triggered.

Event 1, 2

Specify the two events to be linked. The settings are the same for both.

[Event Type]

Select the event type for linking.

[Volume Detection]/[Scream Detection]

[Event] > [Linked Event]

Using Event Combinations

R13

M50

H652

H651

The following settings can be configured here.

• Linked Event 1 to 4

• Event 1, 2

•Operation

Setting Page

201

Select whether an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event in [Status].

[External Device Input]

Select External Device Input 1 or 2 in [External Device Input], and then select an active event or inactive event to

trigger a linked event in [Status].

[Timer]

Select the timer event number to use in [Timer].

[Intelligent Function]

Select the Intelligent Function detection setting number (P. 176) to use in [Intelligent Function], then select whether

an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event in [Status].

Note

You cannot set the same event type for [Event 1] and [Event 2]. However, a combination of [Input 1] and [Input 2] can be specified

for [External Device Input] and a combination of [Timer 1] to [Timer 4] can be set for [Timer].

Operation

Set the operations to be performed when linked events are triggered.

[ON Event Operation]

If [Enable] is set, [Preset] , [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their

settings when a linked event (ON event) is triggered.

[OFF Event Operation]

If [Enable] is set, [Preset] , [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their

settings when a linked event (OFF event) is completed.

[Ongoing ON Event Operation]

Select the operations to be performed when an ON event is triggered.

If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the

linked event.

[Preset]

If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a linked event is

triggered.

It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 131).

Note

[Preset] cannot be configured when [Intelligent Function] is included in [Event Type].

[Video Record]

Select whether to record video depending on the linked event.

If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified

in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 156).

[E-mail Notification]

Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the linked event.

If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.

To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160) beforehand.

[External Device Output for ON Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.

[External Device Output for OFF Event]

Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an OFF event is triggered.

[Audio Playback at ON Event]

If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event is triggered.

[Audio Playback at OFF Event]

If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event completes.

Note

[Audio Playback at ON Event] and [Audio Playback at OFF Event] can only be set when [Event Type] in [Event 1] and [Event 2] is

set to [External Device Input] or [Intelligent Function].

R13

M50

R13

M50

R13 M50

M50

R13

202

[Sound Clip]

Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at ON Event] or [Audio Playback at OFF Event] has been set to [Enable].

You must register the sound clip with [Video and Audio] > [Audio] (P. 148) beforehand.

[Volume]

Enter the volume for the sound clip.

Linked Event Operation Examples

This shows linked event status examples according to the ON/OFF combinations for Event 1 and Event 2.

In the examples below, [Event Gap] is four seconds and each cell in the graphs below represents one second.

[Event Linking Method] Set to [OR]

Only One Event ON

Both Events ON

[Event Linking Method] is Set to [AND], [Event Order] is Specified

This shows examples when [Event Order] is set to [Event 1 -> 2].

When [Event Order] is set to [None] and [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND], linked events will be as in the

examples, even if Event 1 and Event 2 are switched.

When Events Occur in Order 1 -> 2

When Events Occur in Order 2-> 1 -> 2

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

Both events are ON, but their order of occurrence is

incorrect. Therefore, a linked event does not occur here.

Setting Page

203

Event 2 Triggered but Event Gap Setting ([4] sec.) Exceeded

[Status] of Event 1 Set to [OFF], ON States Do Not Coincide

One Event Switches Between ON/OFF

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

The gap between the occurrence of event 2 after the

occurrence of event 1 exceeds the value specified for the

[Event Gap] setting. Therefore, a linked event does not occur.

Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

The linked event does not occur when event 1

turns OFF, but at the moment event 2 turns ON.

Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)

Event 1

Event 2

Consolidated

State

OFF

Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)

204

Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses can be set.

Note

If the same address is duplicated, the address policy that is displayed highest on the list will be applied.

IPv4 Host Access Restrictions

Specify the hosts from which IPv4 access is permitted and prohibited.

[Apply Host Access Restrictions]

Select whether to use IPv4 host access restrictions.

[Default Policy]

Select whether to allow or block access from IPv4 addresses that have not been specified in [Network Address / Subnet].

[Network Address / Subnet]

Enter IPv4 addresses into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.

You can specify the subnet to set access restrictions by network or host.

If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.

[Security] > [Host Restrictions]

Setting Access Restrictions

Important

• To prohibit access via a proxy server in HTTP connection, a proxy server address must be set.

• If host access restriction is set mistakenly, access to the Setting Pages themselves may be prohibited, in which case restoring the

factory default settings will become the only means of recovery.

The following settings can be configured here.

• IPv4 Host Access Restrictions

• IPv6 Host Access Restrictions

Setting Page

205

IPv6 Host Access Restrictions

Specify the hosts from which IPv6 access is permitted and prohibited.

[Apply Host Access Restrictions]

Select whether to use IPv6 host access restrictions.

[Default Policy]

Select whether to allow or block access from IPv6 addresses that have not been specified in [Prefix / Prefix Length].

[Prefix / Prefix Length]

Enter IPv6 addresses (prefixes) into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.

You can specify the prefix length to set access restriction by network or host.

If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.

206

Certificate creation and management, and encrypted communication settings.

Certificates

Create an SSL/TLS certificate.

[Create Self-Signed Certificate]

Enter the following items, click [Apply], and click [Exec] to create a self-signed certificate.

Follow the displayed message and reboot. The certificate created will take effect after rebooting.

Note

Creating a certificate takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.

[Certificate Status]

If no certificate is installed, [Not Installed] will be displayed. If a certificate is installed, the validity period for the certificate

will be displayed.

[Country (C)]

Enter the ISO3166-1 alpha-2 country code.

[State/Province (ST)], [Locality (L)], [Organization (O)], [Organizational Unit (OU)], [Common Name (CN)]

Enter state/province name, locality, organization name, organizational unit and common name in alphanumeric characters

(spaces or printable characters).

Enter an FQDN format host name, etc. to set the common name (required).

[Validity Period Start Date], [Validity Period End Date]

Set the validity period of the certificate to be created (required when creating a self-signed certificate).

[Security] > [SSL/TLS]

Setting HTTP Communication Encryption

Important

Use a self-signed certificate when complete security does not need to be ensured, such as through operation tests. For system

operation, it is recommended that you acquire and install a certificate issued by a CA.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Certificates

• Certificate Management

• Encrypted Communications

Setting Page

207

Certificate Management

Manage the SSL/TLS certificate.

[Generate Certificate Signing Request]

Click [Exec] to create a server private key and generate a certificate signing request.

Once processed, the certificate signing request will be displayed in a separate window.

Note

Generating a certificate signing request takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.

[Display Certificate Signing Request]

Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate signing request.

[Install Server Certificate]

Perform this operation to install a server certificate.

Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].

The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.

[Install Intermediate Certificate]

Perform this operation to install an intermediate certificate.

Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].

The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.

Note

To install an intermediate certificate and a cross root certificate, use a text editor or similar software to place them in the same file and

install them as an intermediate certificate.

[Delete Server Certificate]

Click [Exec] to delete the server certificate.

However, if SSL/TLS communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [HTTPS Connection Policy] to

[HTTP] before deleting a certificate.

The deletion will take effect after rebooting.

[Delete Intermediate Certificate]

Click [Exec] to delete the intermediate certificate along with the cross root certificate.

However, if SSL/TLS communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [HTTPS Connection Policy] to

[HTTP] before deleting a certificate.

The deletion will take effect after rebooting.

[Display Server Certificate Details]

Click [Exec] to view the details of the server certificate.

[Display Self CA Certificate]

Used for the purpose of testing SSL/TLS communications, but otherwise not normally used.

[Backup]

Click [Exec] to perform a backup of the certificates and private key. This can only be performed when [HTTPS] or [HTTP

and HTTPS] is set for [HTTPS Connection Policy] to perform SSL/TLS communication.

[Restore]

Installs the certificates and private key from backup.

Click [Browse] to specify the backup file, then click [Exec]. This can only be performed when [HTTPS] or [HTTP and HTTPS]

is set for [HTTPS Connection Policy] to perform SSL/TLS communication.

The restored certificate will take effect after rebooting.

Encrypted Communications

Set encrypted communications.

[HTTPS Connection Policy]

Set SSL/TLS communication with HTTPS connections.

Select [HTTP] if you do not want to perform SSL/TLS communication.

Select [HTTPS] or [HTTP and HTTPS] if you want to perform SSL/TLS communication. Connections using SSL/TLS are

enabled after restarting.

208

If you select [HTTPS], HTTP access is also redirected to HTTPS to perform SSL/TLS communication.

Note

• It may take a few minutes to generate an SSL/TLS key.

• Depending on the type of the certificate being installed on the camera, a dialog box may be displayed indicating that the web browser

has accepted the certificate and a connection can be made. If the dialog box is not displayed, register the CA certificate in the web

browser.

Important

• Even if you set SSL/TLS communication here, SSL/TLS communication is not performed unless you install a certificate.

• Video distribution performance decreases when performing SSL/TLS communication. If you set [HTTPS], you cannot connect with the

RM.

Setting Page

209

Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication status display, and for certificate administration.

802.1X Authentication

Display the 802.1X authentication enable/disable control and status.

[802.1X Authentication]

Select this to enable or disable 802.1X authentication.

[Authentication Status]

Display the status of 802.1X authentication. There are three types of status: [Authenticated], [Unauthenticated], and [Stop].

Authentication Method

Set the authentication method used for 802.1X authentication.

[Authentication Method]

Select [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP] as the authentication method to use for 802.1X authentication.

[User Name]

Enter the user name used for authentication.

[Password]

Enter the required password for authentication.

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].

Certificate Information

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].

[CA Certificate Status]

If no CA certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a CA certificate is installed, the validity period of the

certificate is displayed.

[Client Certificate Status]

If no client certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client certificate is installed, the validity period of the

certificate is displayed.

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].

[Security] > [802.1X]

Network Port Authentication Settings

The following settings can be configured here.

• 802.1X Authentication

• Authentication Method

• Certificate Information

• Certificate Management

210

[Client Private Key Status]

If no client private key is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client private key is installed, [Installed] is

displayed.

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].

Certificate Management

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].

[Install CA Certificate]

Installs a CA certificate.

Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].

[Install Client Certificate]

Installs a client certificate.

Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].

[Install Client Private Key]

Installs a client private key.

Specify the private key file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].

[Client Private Key Password]

Enter the password for the client private key.

Required when a password has been configured for the private key.

This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].

[Delete Certificate]

Deletes all installed CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys.

Only “CA Certificate” is displayed when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [EAP-PEAP], but any

installed client certificates and client private keys are also deleted.

Important

• If any CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys already exist when installing certificates, they are discarded and

new versions are installed.

• An error occurs if the format of the certificate or private key to be installed is incorrect.

• Client certificates and client private keys are checked as a pair when installing, and an error occurs if they do not match.

• The certificate and private key used for 802.1X authentication must be installed as separate items, irrespective of the installation

status of certificates for SSL/TLS.

Setting Page

211

Settings for using IPsec.

Note

If IPsec is used, video transmission performance drops.

IPsec

[IPsec]

Select the key exchange method when using IPsec.

Auto Key Exchange Settings

[IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm]

Select the IPsec SA encryption algorithm.

The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable encryption algorithm starting from the left.

[IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm]

Select the IPsec SA authentication algorithm.

[Security] > [IPsec]

Setting IPsec

Important

• To run this camera with IPsec, the communicating devices and network must be set beforehand. Contact your system administrator for

these settings.

• When connecting with IPsec, set the camera IP address manually.

For IPv4 addresses, use addresses with [IPv4 Address Setting Method] set to [Manual] in [Basic] > [Network] > [IPv4].

For IPv6 addresses, use addresses set with [IPv6 Address (Manual)] in [Basic] > [Network] > [IPv6].

• If the IPsec setting is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a confirmation dialog box will

be displayed. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.

If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will

be displayed in a message.

If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.

The following settings can be configured here.

•IPsec

• Auto Key Exchange Settings

• IPsec Set 1 to 5

212

The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable authentication algorithm starting from the left.

[IPsec SA Validity Period (min)]

Enter the duration of validity for IPsec SA.

[ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm]

Select the SA encryption algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.

[ISAKMP SA Authentication Algorithm]

Select the SA authentication algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.

[DH Group]

Select the key generation information that will be used in the DH algorithm for key exchange via auto key exchange protocol

IKE. The higher the group number, the stronger security will be.

[ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min)]

Enter the duration of validity for ISAKMP SA.

IPsec Set 1 to 5

IP security can be specified through auto key exchange or manual setting with up to five communicating devices.

Auto Key Exchange

Note

If auto key exchange is used, it will take approximately 5 to 10 seconds before communication with the camera starts.

[IPsec Set]

Select which IPsec sets the camera will use; IPv4, IPv6, or neither.

[IPsec Mode]

Select the IPsec mode.

[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the connection destination.

[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the source.

[Security Protocol]

Select the IPsec protocol.

If you select [ESP], enter only the setting items relating to ESP.

If you select [AH], enter only the setting items relating to AH.

If you select [ESP and AH], enter all setting items.

[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].

[Destination Subnet Mask Length (IPv4)], [Destination Prefix Length (IPv6)]

Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].

[IKE Pre-Shared Key]

Enter the pre-shared key for IKE (auto key exchange).

Manual

[IPsec Set]

Select which IPsec sets the camera will use; IPv4, IPv6, or neither.

Important

If the camera is rebooted during auto key exchange communication, a connection error may result after rebooting. If this occurs,

connect again.

Setting Page

213

[IPsec Mode]

Select the IPsec mode.

[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the connection destination.

[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the source.

[Security Protocol]

Select the IPsec protocol.

If you select [ESP], enter only the setting items relating to ESP.

If you select [AH], enter only the setting items relating to AH.

If you select [ESP and AH], enter all setting items.

[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]

Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].

[Destination Subnet Mask Length (IPv4)], [Destination Prefix Length (IPv6)]

Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].

If the Setting in [Security Protocol] Includes “ESP”

[SA ESP Encryption Algorithm]

Set the ESP encryption algorithm to suit the encryption algorithm supported by the device to connect to.

Normally [AES] or [3DES] is recommended.

[SA ESP Authentication Algorithm]

Set the ESP authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.

If [ESP] is used alone, [No Authentication] cannot be selected.

[SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)]

Enter the SA encryption key for outbound.

If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal

number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.

[SA ESP Authentication Key (outbound)]

Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.

If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit

hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.

[SA ESP SPI (outbound)]

Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.

Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.

[SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)]

Enter the SA encryption key for inbound.

If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal

number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.

[SA ESP Authentication Key (inbound)]

Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.

If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit

hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.

[SA ESP SPI (inbound)]

Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.

Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.

Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is

already used in the SPI for another ESP.

If the Setting in [Security Protocol] Includes “AH”

[SA AH Authentication Algorithm]

Set the AH authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.

214

[SA AH Authentication Key (outbound)]

Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.

If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit

hexadecimal number, respectively.

[SA AH SPI (outbound)]

Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.

Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.

[SA AH Authentication Key (inbound)]

Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.

If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit

hexadecimal number, respectively.

[SA AH SPI (outbound)]

Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.

Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.

Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is

already used in the SPI for another AH.

Setting Page

215

Settings for recording video to a memory card inserted in the camera. You can also see the status of the memory card.

[Memory Card] is the same as [Video Record] > [Memory Card]. Settings configured on one [Memory Card] page are also

reflected on the other.

Note

• Memory card videos can be viewed and managed using the Recorded Video Utility. For information on operating the Recorded Video

Utility and its downloaded data, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.

• When a large number of files have been recorded onto a memory card, the Recorded Video Utility can take a considerable amount of

time to process the video list (the greater the number of files, the longer it will take). Please reduce the number of days saved in [Auto

Video Delete], or manually delete unneeded files with the Recorded Video Utility, on a regular basis.

The number of files saved on the memory card can greatly be reduced, by using H.264 as the video format, instead of JPEG.

• The following memory cards can be used.

– SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card

– microSD memory card, microSDHC memory card, microSDXC memory card

• For inserting and removing the memory card, please refer to “Installation Guide”.

Video Record Setting

Sets whether to record video from the camera to a memory card or upload it with HTTP or FTP.

These can also be set with [Video Record] > [Upload] (P. 156) and will be reflected in [Video Record Setting] here.

[Video Record Action]

Select [Record to Memory Card] to record to a memory card.

Memory Card Operations

The setting items will change depending on the memory card status (unmounted/mounted).

[Memory Card]

Memory Card Operations and Information Display

Important

Information recorded to the memory card may be regarded as “personal information”. Take sufficient precautions for handling this

information when releasing the camera to third parties for disposal, transfer or repair.

Important

Be sure to perform the unmount process when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card. Failing to unmount first

may result in management file problems or the memory card becoming inaccessible.

You can use the Camera Management Tool (P. 21) to batch mount/unmount memory cards from multiple cameras.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Video Record Setting

• Memory Card Operations

• Memory Card Information

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

216

The memory card will be automatically mounted when you insert it into the memory card slot. It will also be automatically

mounted if it has been inserted in the memory card slot when the camera starts up.

[Mount/Unmount]

Click [Unmount] to unmount the memory card.

Be sure to unmount the memory card when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card.

Also click [Mount] with the memory card inserted to mount the memory card.

[Operation Settings]

Select the data to save to the memory card.

When [Save Logs and Videos] has been set, the following data is saved automatically.

• Image files of recording-mode stream that could not be distributed due to a network error

• Video files when HTTP or FTP upload failed

• Video files manually recorded by the user from the Camera Viewer (JPEG/H.264(1))

• Video files recorded by [External Device Input], [Volume Detection] and [Intelligent Function] when an event occurs

• Video files recorded using a timer

•Log

• Video recorded with ONVIF

Note

New files cannot be saved to the memory card if there is no free space. When [Overwrite videos] is set to [Enable], old video can be

deleted to save new video (P. 216).

[Video Format]

Select the video format to record to a memory card.

Video is recorded in this format when [Video Record Action] is set to [Record to Memory Card].

Video size and quality of the recorded video follow the settings in [Video] (P. 104).

Note

• When set to [JPEG] and an upload error occurs, the frame rate of video recorded in JPEG format is always 1 fps.

• When a network error occurs interrupting the transmission of recording-mode stream video, video is saved in the JPEG format

regardless of the [Video Format] setting (the frame rate is fixed at 1 fps).

[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)

Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.

Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video

Format].

Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.

[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)

Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.

Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video

Format].

Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.

[Overwrite videos]

Select whether to allow overwriting data when the available space on the memory card becomes too low while recording

video to a memory card due to an event being triggered.

If you select [Enable], videos recorded due to an event, timer or ONVIF will be overwritten starting from the oldest file.

If you select [Disable], use the Recorded Video Utility to delete unnecessary videos. For information on the procedure,

please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual.”

[Auto Video Delete]

Select to automatically delete video from the memory card that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.

If you select [Enable], set [Days Saved] and [Delete Time].

[Days Saved]

Enter the number of days for which video recorded to the memory card should be saved.

Important

For [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)], the following settings must be configured in [Video] > [H.264(1)] (P. 105), H.264(2) (P. 106).

–[Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control]

–[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less

–[I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]

Setting Page

217

[Delete Time]

Enter the time to delete video that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.

[Recreate Video Management Information]

If you click [Exec], the management information file for recorded video will be recreated on the memory card.

The memory card cannot be accessed during this process. It is also recommended that users not upload or stream video

from the camera.

When recreating video management information files, the more files you recreate, the longer the process will take; it may

require several hours.

[Format]

Click [Exec] to format the memory card.

Formatting erases all files and directories on the memory card.

Note

Formatting is performed using a quick format.

Memory Card Information

Displays the status of the memory card inserted in the camera and information about card capacity.

[Memory Card Recognition]

Displays the current status of the memory card.

[Memory Card Operation Status]

Displays the operation status of the memory card.

[Operable]: All operations are possible.

[Recreating video management information]: This status indicates that video management information is being recreated.

Other operations cannot be performed.

[Deleting videos]: This status indicates that videos are being deleted. Other operations cannot be performed.

[Video Management Information Status]

Displays the status of the video management information.

[Normal]: This status indicates that video management information is normal.

[Video Management Information Recreation Required]: This status indicates that management files are corrupted or not

consistent with saved video files.

It is necessary to click [Exec] in [Recreate Video Management Information] to recreate the management file.

If the management files are not recreated even when [Recreate Video Management Information] is used, [Format]

(P. 217) must be used.

[Video Saving]

Displays whether videos can be saved to the memory card.

[Cannot Save] may occur for the following reasons.

• Memory card is not mounted.

• The video management file is corrupted.

• The card is write-protected.

• The memory card is full and [Overwrite videos] is set to [Disable].

[Memory Card Capacity]

Displays the current capacity of the memory card.

[Used Capacity]

Displays the current used capacity of the memory card.

218

Check camera information, such as the firmware version, and perform maintenance on the camera system.

Device Information

[Model Name], [Firmware Version], [Serial Number], [Build Number] and [MAC address]

Displays information about the camera.

Tool

You can configure/reboot the camera and display licenses.

[View Current Settings]

Display a list of current settings for the Setting Page.

[View License]

Display information on the third-party software licenses.

[Reboot]

Reboot the camera.

[Refresh Drive System]

When Refresh Drive System is executed, the camera pans twice in both directions horizontally, and then returns to the

camera angle prior to execution.

If you repeatedly perform pan/tilt operations for a long time, video or audio problem linked to pan operations may occur.

In this case, executing Refresh Drive System may resolve these problems.

Note

The following users will be disconnected while refreshing the drive system.

– All users except for administrators

– Users not connected via RTP

Initialization

Initialize the camera.

[Maintenance] > [General]

Displaying Camera Device Information and Perform

Maintenance

The following settings can be configured here.

• Device Information

• Tool

• Initialization

R13 R12

Setting Page

219

[Network Settings]

If you set this to [Save], the following settings are retained when initializing.

• Administrator Name

• Password

• Network Settings

• Time Zone

• Certificates

• Private Key

If you set this to [Do not save], the above settings are also initialized.

Since the administrator account is also initialized, you will become unable to connect to the camera. Use the Camera

Management Tool to configure the initial settings (P. 38).

[Revert to Initial Settings]

The initial settings are restored according to the selection in [Network Settings] after rebooting.

Note

• It is recommended that you back up each current setting before you click [Exec] in [Restore Default Settings].

• The camera can also be restored to factory default settings using the reset switch. Note, however, that this will reset all camera settings

to factory default settings except for date and time (P. 245).

Caution

• You must not turn off the camera while [Restore Default Settings] is in operation. Turning off the camera at this stage

may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.

• Once [OK] is clicked, you can no longer stop the process of restoring the default settings.

220

You can save/restore all the camera settings.

Backup / Restore

Configure the settings regarding backup and restoring.

[Save Destination]

Select the destination for saving the camera settings when backing up.

[Back Up Settings]

All settings, except date and time, will be backed up. The administrator account, certificates used by SSL/TLS and 802.1X

and private key will also be backed up.

[Restore Settings]

Restores all settings, except date and time, from the backup file created with [Back Up Settings].

If [PC] is selected in [Save Destination], click [Browse] to specify the backup file.

The administrator account, IP address, certificates used by SSL/TLS and 802.1X and private key will also be restored.

After restore is completed, the camera will be rebooted.

[Encryption Password]

Set the password to use when backing up and restoring. This is the password for encrypting the backup data itself.

When restoring from encrypted backup data, enter the password set when backing up.

Note

The settings are not restored if the password set when backing up and the password set when restoring do not match.

[Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore]

Saving/Restoring Camera Settings

Caution

You must not turn off the camera while [Back Up Settings] or [Restore Settings] are in operation. Turning off the camera at

this stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.

Important

• Take care when restoring from the backup file of another camera, as problems such as not being able to connect to the camera may

occur due to the network address conflicting or the administrator password being overwritten.

• When restoring the settings, do not use a backup file created with a firmware version newer than that of the camera to restore.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Backup / Restore

Setting Page

221

You can update the firmware.

Device Information

[Model Name] and [Firmware Version]

Displays the information about the connected camera.

Updating Firmware

Configure the settings related to firmware updates.

[Restore Default Settings]

The initial settings are restored when the firmware is updated.

If you set this to [Restore], the following settings are retained when initializing.

• Administrator Name

• Password

• Network Settings

• Time Zone

• Certificates

• Private Key

[Update Firmware]

Click [Browse], specify a firmware file for update, and click [Exec]. When the confirmation message is displayed, click [OK]

to start the firmware update.

The camera is rebooted after the firmware is updated.

[Maintenance] > [Update Firmware]

Updating the Camera Firmware

Caution

You must not turn off the camera while it is performing the [Update Firmware] operation. Turning off the camera at this

stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.

The following settings can be configured here.

• Update Firmware

222

You can check the camera operations and connection history, and set log message e-mail transmission.

View Logs

Display a history of camera operations and connections.

[View Logs]

If you click [View], the log messages saved since the camera was started are displayed.

For details on log messages, please refer to “List of Log Messages” (P. 230).

Log Notifications

Set the mail server and e-mail address to use for log notification.

[Use log notifications]

If you select [Enable], the following setting items for log notification are displayed.

[Notification Level]

Select the log notification level.

For details on levels of log messages, please refer to “Log Messages on the Camera” (P. 230).

[Copy E-mail Settings]

Copies the e-mail settings used in [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 160). However, [Password] is not copied.

[Mail Server Name]

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

[Mail Server Port]

Enter the port number for the SMTP server (factory default setting is [25]).

[Sender (From)]

Enter the e-mail address of the sender.

[Recipient (To)]

Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.

[Authentication]

Select an authentication method suited to the destination SMTP server.

[Maintenance] > [Log]

Checking/Sending Camera Log Information

The following settings can be configured here.

• View Logs

• Log Notifications

Setting Page

223

[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]

Enter the user name and password needed for authentication, and the POP server host name or IP address when e-mail

authentication is set to [POP before SMTP].

Enter the user name and password needed for authentication when e-mail authentication is set to [SMTP-AUTH].

[Subject]

Enter the subject of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.

[Log Notification Test]

Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test based on the settings currently entered.

If something other than [None] is selected for [Authentication], click [Exec] before clicking [Apply] after entering the

[Password].

224

Chapter

Appendix

This chapter provides supplementary information on camera functions, and explains the measures to take

when trouble occurs or a message is displayed during camera use. It also explains how to reset the camera to

the factory default setting state.

226

According to the setting item, you can specify parameters using modifier “% characters”.

Note

• A runtime error will occur if the specified name does not match.

• If this modifier is not defined, “%” will be deleted.

Modifiers

Meaning Description of character string entered

%n Reason for capture (number) 0 (test) | 1 (External device input 1) | 2 (External device input 2) |

Detection) | 160 (Auto Tracking) | 161 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 1) |

162 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 2) | 163 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 3) |

164 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 4) | 165 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 5) |

166 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 6) | 167 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 7) |

168 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 8) | 169 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 9) |

170 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 10) | 171 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 11) |

172 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 12) | 173 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 13) |

174 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 14) | 175 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 15) |

201 (Linked Event 1) | 202 (Linked Event 2) | 203 (Linked Event 3) | 204 (Linked Event 4)

%N Reason for capture

(character string)

<External input device name (alphanumeric characters) > | Intelligent Function Detection Setting name

| NULL (blank entry or interval timer test)

%O Reason for capture (ON/OFF) OFF | ON

%X Width of image Number of pixels in horizontal direction

%Y Height of image Number of pixels in vertical direction

%C Camera number 1

%D Camera Name Setting for [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)]

%P Pan position -180.00 – 180.00 -179.99 – 180.00 0

%T Tilt position

-180.00 – 180.00 -179.99 – 180.00 0

%Z Zoom position 0.01 – 300.00

%R Rotation position 0

%V Camera server VB-R13VE / VB-R13 / VB-R12VE / VB-M50B / VB-H652LVE / VB-H651V

%y Year of capture time 2001 – 2031

%m Month of capture time 01 – 12

%d Day of capture time 01 – 31

%w Day of week of capture time 0 – 6 (Sunday to Saturday)

%H Hours of capture time 00 – 23

%M Minutes of capture time 00 – 59

%S Seconds of capture time 00 – 59

%s Milliseconds of capture time 000 – 999

%z Time zone of capture time -1200 – +1300

%a Weekday name of capture

time

Sun | Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat

%b Month name of capture time Jan | Feb | Mar | Apr | May | Jun | Jul | Aug | Sep | Oct | Nov | Dec

%h Host Name

R13 R12 M50

H652 H651

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

Appendix

227

Available Modifiers

The modifiers that can be used for each setting item are specified below.

[HTTP Upload] (P. 157)

[Parameter (query string)]

All modifiers can be used.

[FTP Upload] (P. 158)

[Subdirectory Name to Create]

Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %h, %n can be used.

[File Name to Create]

Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %M, %S, %s, %n can be used.

[E-mail Notification] (P. 160)

[Message Body]

All modifiers can be used.

228

Before contacting the dealer from whom you purchased the product or Canon Customer Service Center, check the

following items. If a log message is displayed, check the details of the message and the corresponding countermeasures in

the log message list.

Note

• For information on troubleshooting for the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

• For information on troubleshooting for the Recorded Video Utility, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.

Troubleshooting

Problem Countermeasures

The camera does not launch. • If you are using a PoE hub, check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.

• If you are using an AC adapter (sold separately), check if the AC adapter is

connected correctly.

• Turn the camera off and on again (please refer to “Installation Guide”).

Cannot connect to the camera. • Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.

• Check if the network to which the camera is connected is set up correctly. In

particular, check if the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway address are set

within the ranges supported by the applicable network.

• If you have changed the IP address, the new address will not become effective until

the camera is rebooted.

• Check if the correct URI (camera IP address) is entered in your web browser (P. 40).

• Check whether the connection is from a computer whose access is blocked in

[Security] > [Host Restrictions] (P. 204) on the Setting Page.

• Ask your system administrator whether the authentication method set in [Security] >

[802.1X] (P. 209) on the Setting Page and the combination of [User Name],

[Password] and certificates match the rules of the network to connect to.

The Camera Viewer will not launch. • If the message “Your web browser is not supported.” is displayed, use Internet

Explorer 9 or greater, or a version of Chrome that is guaranteed to operate.

• If the message “JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser.” is

displayed, click [Network and Internet] > [Internet Option] > [Security] > [Custom

Level] in [Control Panel], and set [Active scripting] to [Enable].

• To enable authorized users and guest users to use the Camera Viewer, specify the following

settings on the Setting Page.

– Assign [Camera Control] or [Video Distribution] to authorized users/guest users in

[Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].

– Set [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] to [Display Viewer].

– To also enable guest users to use the Camera Viewer, set [Basic] > [Viewer] >

[Viewer Settings] to [Do not authenticate].

Cannot use some functions of the Camera

Viewer.

• Follow the procedure in “Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site” (P. 34) to

add this website to [Trusted sites] in the [Security] settings.

• If you are using a web browser other than Internet Explorer or if the Canon Network

Camera Addon Module is not correctly installed when using Internet Explorer, the

following functions cannot be used.

– Receiving/transmitting audio

– Receiving/playing H.264 video

Video is not displayed. • The number of Viewers that can access the camera at the same time is restricted by

the setting in [Maximum Number of Clients] in [Server] > [Video Server] (a maximum

of 30 can be specified). If this restriction is exceeded, a message is displayed and

video is not displayed.

• Video can only be displayed by authorized users and guest users if [Video

Distribution] privileges are assigned. Ask your administrator to assign [Video

Distribution] privileges in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].

• If the Viewer is opened with Internet Explorer 10 or 11 on a 64-bit operating system,

H.264 video may not be able to be received or played if the camera is added to the list

of trusted sites and the enhanced protected mode is enabled. In this case, add the

camera to the list of trusted sites to disable the protected mode of trusted sites.

R13 M50

H652

H651

Appendix

229

There is no audio. • If there is no audio, check the audio server settings of the camera as well as the sound

and audio device settings for the computer.

• If the Camera Viewer is used with administrator privileges, check whether the Viewer

using audio with the administrator privileges of RM Viewer, etc. is connected to the

camera.

• Audio can only be used by authorized users and guest users if [Audio Distribution]

privileges are assigned. Ask your administrator to assign [Audio Distribution]

privileges in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].

• If the Viewer is opened with Internet Explorer 10 or 11 on a 64-bit operating system,

the audio may not be able to be received or transmitted if the enhanced protected

mode is enabled. In this case, add the camera to the list of trusted sites to disable the

protected mode of trusted sites.

The camera cannot be controlled. • If you connect the Camera Viewer as an administrator, you will have exclusive

possession of the camera control privileges. If you connect to the Viewer as an

authorized user or guest user, you cannot control the camera unless the administrator

releases camera control. Consult the administrator (P. 55).

The viewer gets disconnected. • Check the network and computer for abnormality.

• Reboot the computer and connect again.

• Connections from authorized users and guest users are disconnected while creating a

panorama image.

You forgot the administrator password. • You can initialize all settings of the camera excluding date and time using the reset

switch (P. 245). After performing initialization, use the Camera Management Tool to

need to be set again because the network settings are initialized.

Data cannot be uploaded. • Check that the upload destination of [Video Record] > [Upload] and the upload

operation upon an event of the [Event] menu are both set correctly.

• The settings for an upload destination that has been applied can be checked by

executing a server upload test in [Video Record] > [Upload] on the Setting Page

(P. 156).

• Check [Maintenance] > [Log] > [View Logs] > [View Logs] or logs on the server to

check the detailed operating environment. For details on [View Logs], please refer to

“Uploader error” (P. 233), “Uploader warning” (P. 237), or “Uploader notification”

(P. 240) of “List of Log Messages”. Also please refer to “Important” on P. 156.

• For the server settings, contact your system administrator.

Video cannot be recorded on an memory

card.

• Check [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Information] on the Setting Page (P. 217).

• Video cannot be recorded if the memory card has insufficient space and [Memory

Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Overwrite videos] is set to [Disable] on the

Setting Page (P. 216). Set [Overwrite videos] to [Enable] or use the Recorded Video

Utility to delete unnecessary videos.

• To record video to an memory card when an event occurs, check the [Video Record

Action] settings under [Video Record] > [Memory Card] >[Video Record Setting] in

the Setting Page. When [Video Record Action] is set to [Upload], change it to [Record

to Memory Card].

• When recording-mode stream video that could not be transmitted due to network

errors or video for which the HTTP/FTP upload failed is not stored on the memory card,

check [Operation Settings] under [Video Record] > [Memory Card] > [Memory Card

Operations] in the Setting Page. When [Operation Settings] is set to [Save Log],

change it to [Save Logs and Videos].

• To manually save recordings to a memory card, obtain camera control privileges.

Files cannot be saved. • Windows prohibits saving to certain folders. Accordingly, an attempt to save a file may

fail. Specify [Documents], [Pictures] and other folders.

Problem Countermeasures

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12 M50

230

Log Messages on the Camera

The list of log messages displayed in [View Logs] in [Maintenance] > [Log] > [View Logs] on the Setting Page (P. 222).

Log messages are classified into the following types.

Note

If no content is recorded in a log for approximately two hours, “-- MARK --” will be recorded in the message area.

Error Log

System Error

S302 Error on saving settings [err]

S303 Error on saving settings [err]

S307 Error on saving settings [err]

S310 Working error in event service [err]

List of Log Messages

Category Level Code Fault level

crit Error 4xx Software-level failure (Task operations will stop)

err Error 3xx Operational error (Operations will continue)

warning Warning 2xx Non-operational error

notice Warning 1xx Error external to the system

info Information 0xx Information on normal operation

Description Can’t update system settings (S302)

Meaning An error generated while the system

was saving a setting. Setting could not

be saved.

Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by

deleting unnecessary files in the user

memory area, etc.

Description Can’t update files of system settings

(S303)

Meaning An error generated while the system

was saving a setting. Setting could not

be saved.

Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by

deleting unnecessary files in the user

memory area, etc.

Description (vbadmin.c XXX) Can’t update system

settings (S307)

Meaning An error generated while the settings

were saved by the setup protocol.

Setting could not be saved.

Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by

deleting unnecessary files in the user

memory area, etc.

Description cannot work event [%1][%2][%3]

(S310)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

%3 Error information

Meaning An error occurred while the event

service was running.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Appendix

231

S311 Working error in external input/output

service [err]

S312 Working error in timer service [err]

S320 PAN/TILT operation error [err]

S330 Failure of fan [err]

S331 Failure of heater [err]

S410 Event service initialization error [crit]

S411 External input/output service

initialization error [crit]

S412 Timer service initialization error [crit]

Description cannot work extio [%1][%2][%3]

(S311)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

%3 Error information

Meaning An error occurred while the external

input/output device service was

running.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description cannot work timer [%1][%2][%3]

(S312)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

%3 Error information

Meaning An internal error occurred in the timer

service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description %1 error occurred. [%2] (S320)

%1 PAN | TILT

%2 Warning details

Meaning An error occurred during operation or

stopping of PAN/TILT.

Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching

the dome, etc.

If the error is not caused by problems

such as contact with peripheral items,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description fan [%1] is stopped (S330)

%1 Fan number

Meaning Detected that the fan is not rotating or

the rotation speed has significantly

decreased.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the fan may have failed. Arrange for

servicing.

Description HEATER [%1] failure (S331)

%1 Heater number

Meaning An abnormality was detected when

using the heater.

Countermeasure There may be a connection problem

with the heater unit you attached, so

check the connections. If the problem

persists after rebooting, the heater may

have failed. Arrange for servicing.

Description event initialization error [%1][%2]

(S410)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of

the event service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description extio initialization error [%1][%2]

(S411)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of

the external input/output device

service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description timer initialization error [%1][%2]

(S412)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of

the timer service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

232

S413 Timer service runtime error [crit]

S420 External IO controller has failed [crit]

S430 Failure of temperature sensor [crit]

Audio server error

B301 Audio device error [err]

B402 Audio server initialization failed [err]

B403 Settings change failed [err]

Video error

V300 Video input error [err]

V320 Internal error in intelligent service [err]

V321 Pseudo mode setting error in intelligent

service [err]

Description timer working error [%1] (S413)

%1 Error number

Meaning An error occurred while the timer

service was running.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description external io controller is broken.(S420)

Meaning The external IO controller has failed.

Countermeasure The external IO controller firmware

must be updated. If the problem

persists after updating the firmware,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description cannot get temperature (S430)

Meaning The temperature cannot be acquired

from the temperature sensor.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the circuit board may have failed.

Arrange for servicing.

Description cannot use audio device for

%1[%2:%3] (B301)

%1 Send/Receive type (rx | tx)

%2 Error type (open | write | flush)

%3 Error number

Meaning Detected an error in the audio device

Countermeasure If the problem persists, please arrange

for servicing.

Description wvaudio initialization error [%1] (B402)

%1 Error number

Meaning The audio server could not be

initialized. The audio server stops.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description cannot set config [%1:%2] (B403)

%1 Error notification number

%2 Error number

Meaning The settings could not be updated.

The audio server stops.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description video %1 warning - %2 (V300)

%1 Video number

%2 Error number

Meaning An error in the video input was

detected that may adversely affect the

operation of the camera.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description cannot work intelligent [%1][%2][%3].

(V320)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

%3 Error information

Meaning An internal error occurred in intelligent

service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description pseudo mode setting fail. (V321)

Meaning An error occurred in the pseudo mode

setting of intelligent service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Appendix

233

V400 Video input initialization error [crit]

V401 Video input command error [crit]

V402 Video input frozen [crit]

V403 Video input error [crit]

V420 Could not start intelligent service [crit]

V421 Intelligent service error [crit]

Uploader error

A470 Uploader initialization failed [crit]

Memory card error

M301 Memory card control module error [err]

M302 Cannot remove invalid file [err]

Description video %1 initialization failure - %2(%3)

(V400)

%1 Video number

%2 Process description

%3 Error details

Meaning The video input function was stopped

because the video input system could

not be initialized.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description video %1 command error - %2(%3)

(V401)

%1 Video number

%2 Process description

%3 Error details

Meaning The video input function was stopped

because a video input command could

not be processed.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description video %1 stalled (V402)

%1 Video number

Meaning The video input function was stopped

because video generation stopped.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description video %1 fatal error - %2 (V403)

%1 Video number

%2 Error number

Meaning The video input function was stopped

because an error that does not permit

recovery of the video input system was

detected.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description intelligent initialization error [%1][%2].

(V420)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

Meaning Failed to initialize intelligent service.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description intelligent working error [%1][%2].

(V421)

%1 Error number

%2 Cause of error

Meaning An error that does not permit recovery

occurred while intelligent service was

running.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description uploader initialization failure - %1

(A470)

%1 Error number

Meaning The uploader could not be initialized.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,

the camera is faulty. Arrange for

servicing.

Description %1 process failure (M301)

%1 mount or unmount

Meaning Mount or unmount process failed.

Description Invalid file (%1) can not remove.

(M302)

%1 Name of removed file

Meaning The invalid file could not be removed.

234

M303 Cannot process directory [err]

M304 Failed to recreate management

information [err]

M305 Error when writing a video file [err]

M400 Failed to initialize a memory card [crit]

ONVIF error (RTP)

R301 Distribution communication error [err]

R302 Parameter acquisition failure [err]

R303 Metadata distribution initialization

failure [err]

R304 Abnormal termination of client [err]

R304 Client disconnected [err]

R305 RTSP processing error [err]

Description Can not open directory(%1)(M303)

%1 Directory name

Meaning Could not open directory to be

processed.

Description Fail updating management

file(%1)(M304)

%1 Management information identification

number

Meaning Process to recreate management

information failed.

Description write error %1 (%2) (M305)

%1 Video file path

%2 Reason for error

Meaning An error occurred when writing a video

file.

Description Fail SD card initialization(%1).(M400)

%1 Card initialization NG (det), power

supplies control NG (proc)

Meaning Process to initialize a memory card

failed.

Description message queue open error. %1 (R301)

%1 Modules that generate errors

RTP_CTRL_QUEUE

RTP_DATA_QUEUE

VIDEO_CTRL_QUEUE

VIDEO_DATA_QUEUE

AUDIO_CTRL_QUEUE

AUDIO_DATA_QUEUE

EVENT_CTRL_QUEUE

RECVQ_META

SENDQ_MEDIA

Meaning A communication error occurred

between modules.

Countermeasure If the problem persists after repeated

attempts and rebooting, the camera

may be faulty. Arrange for servicing.

Description cannot get parameter: %1 (R302)

%1 user_account: User account

IP_address: IP address of the camera

profile_media_configuration:

MediaConfiguration information

RTSP_port_number: RTSP port number

Meaning Parameter acquisition has failed.

Description metadata initialization error (R303)

Meaning Metadata distribution initialization has

failed.

Description delete session from some kind of error:

client_IP=%1, session_ID=%2 (R304)

%1 Client IP address

%2 Session ID

Meaning The client session terminated

abnormally.

Description connection reset by peer:

client_IP=%1 (R304)

%1 Client IP address

Meaning Disconnected from client.

Description RTP/HTTP connection closed by client

(R304)

Meaning Disconnected from client.

Description RTSP Error: error_code=500: Internal

Server Error (R305)

Meaning An RTSP processing error occurred.

Appendix

235

Warning log

System warning

S220 PAN/TILT operation warning [warning]

S230 Decrease of fan rotation speed

[warning]

S231 Heater unit not operating [warning]

HTTP server warning

H143 User name specification error [notice]

H144 Password specification error [notice]

H201 Timeout disconnect [warning]

wvhttp warning

W101 Invalid user name [notice]

W102 Invalid password [notice]

W130 Buffer recovered [notice]

W201 Invalid panorama image [warning]

Description %1 warning detected. [%2] (S220)

%1 PAN | TILT

%2 Warning details

Meaning An error occurred during operation or

stopping of PAN/TILT.

Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching

the dome, etc.

Description fan [%1] speed is too slow. (S230)

%1 Fan number

Meaning Detected decrease in fan rotation

speed.

If this happens frequently, arrange for

servicing.

Description A 24 V AC power source is not

supplied to the heater unit. (S231)

Meaning A heater unit is attached but not

supplied with a 24 V AC power source.

Countermeasure The 24 V AC power source required to

operate the heater unit is not being

supplied. Check the type of power

source and the power connection.

Description (http_auth.c.XXX) get_password failed,

IP:%1 (H143)

%1 IP address

Meaning An unknown user was specified in user

authentication. This log message may

also be displayed during normal

operations when using a web browser

other than Internet Explorer/Microsoft

Edge.

Description (http_auth.c.XXX) password doesn’t

match for %1 username%2, IP:%3

(H144)

%1 URL XSS vulnerability countermeasure

implementation (process equivalent to

ftpd)

%2 User Name

%3 IP address

Meaning A wrong password was specified in

user authentication.

Description a request for %1 timed out after writing

%d seconds (H201)

%1 Request URI

%d 360 (Timeout time)

Meaning Disconnected due to HTTP server

timeout (360 sec.).

Description user <User name> not found (W101)

Meaning The camera was accessed by an

unauthorized user.

Description user <User name> password

mismatch (W102)

Meaning The password is invalid.

Description stream buffer recovered (W130)

Meaning Image buffer for stream recording has

recovered.

Description corrupt panorama image - ignored

(W201)

Meaning Panorama image information

acquisition failed.

236

W230 Buffer overflow [warning]

Audio server warning

B101 Received unusual request [notice]

B102 Client connection denied [notice]

B103 Client forcibly disconnected [notice]

B201 Event notification failure [warning]

B202 Event receive failure [warning]

B203 Audio message send failure [warning]

B204 Audio message receive error [warning]

Camera application warning

C201 Day/Night Mode switching warning

[warning]

C211 Camera control command overflow

[warning]

Description stream buffer overflowed (W230)

Meaning The image buffer for the stream

recording overflowed and images were

discarded.

Description %1 unusual request[%2] (B101)

%1 Client host’s IP address

%2 Unusual type (400 | 404)

Meaning Refused due to command error (400)

and parameter error (404).

Description %1 request denied[%2] (B102)

%1 Client host IP address

%2 Denial type (41 | 43 | ...)

Meaning Client connection was denied due to

an authentication error (41), time

specification error (42), insufficient

resource (43), specification of

unsupported codec (45), specification

of unpermitted user level (47), too

many clients (49) or invalid operation

mode (4a).

Countermeasure 41: Check user name, password or

user list used when connecting.

42: Check playtime or maximum

connection time settings used when

connecting.

43: Reconnect or restart.

45: Use supported client software.

47: Check user level used when

connecting.

49: Check client number settings.

4a: Check if usage of audio server is

enabled.

Description %1 access denied[%2] (B103)

%1 Client host IP address

%2 Denial type (41 | 42 | 4a)

Meaning Connection was initially permitted, but

the setting has subsequently been

changed to prohibit access, thereby

triggering a forced disconnection (the

denial type is the same with B102).

Description cannot notify %1 event [%2] (B201)

%1 Event type (ald)

%2 Error number

Meaning Failed to notify event.

Description cannot recv event [%1] (B202)

%1 Error number

Meaning Failed to receive event.

Description audio message send error %1 [%2]

(B203)

%1 Message type

%2 Error number

Meaning Failed to send audio message.

Description audio message recv error [%1:%2]

(B204)

%1 Error number

%2 Reason for error

Meaning Failed to receive audio message.

Description Can’t switch Day/Night mode, because

current mode is Auto.(C201)

Meaning Day/Night Mode could not be

switched.

Countermeasure Set Day/Night Mode to manual.

Description command queue overflowed (C211)

Meaning The camera control command queue

overflowed, and some commands

were discarded.

Countermeasure Allow a longer interval (200 ms) for

sending the camera control command.

Appendix

237

Video warning

V200 Video input warning [warning]

Uploader warning

A120 Resolution of upload destination name

failed [notice]

A121 Connection to upload destination failed

[notice]

A122 Connection to upload destination failed

[notice]

A134 Invalid upload setting (FTP/HTTP

mode) [notice]

A135 Invalid upload setting (FTP PORT/

PASV mode) [notice]

A136 Invalid upload setting (HTTP

notification only/image mode) [notice]

A137 Invalid upload setting (E-mail

notification) [notice]

A138 Invalid upload setting (E-mail

notification authentication mode) [notice]

A274 Event buffer for upload overflowed

[warning]

A275 Image buffer for upload overflowed

[warning]

Description video %1 warning - %2 (V200)

%1 Video number

%2 Error number

Meaning An error that permits recovery of the

video input system was detected.

Countermeasure Change video size or video quality, or

decrease data size for each JPEG

image.

Description uploader cannot resolve the server

name (A120)

Meaning The name of the upload destination

could not be resolved.

Description uploader cannot connect the server

(A121)

Meaning Execution of connect to upload

destination failed.

Description uploader cannot connect the server

(A122)

Meaning The upload destination could not be

connected due to a reason other than

A120 and A121.

Description ftp/http mode invalid. uploader set

<none> forcibly (A134)

Meaning The upload mode setting is invalid. The

upload function was forcibly disabled.

Description ftp port/pasv mode invalid. uploader

set <pasv> forcibly (A135)

Meaning The PORT/PASV mode setting in

connection with FTP upload is invalid.

The PASV mode was forcibly set.

Description http notice/image mode invalid.

uploader set <image> forcibly (A136)

Meaning The notification only/image mode

setting in connection with HTTP upload

is invalid. The image mode was

forcibly set.

Description mode invalid. uploader set <none>

forcibly (A137)

Meaning The e-mail notification setting is invalid.

Email notification was forcibly

disabled.

Description authentication mode invalid. uploader

set <smtp auth> forcibly (A138)

Meaning The setting for e-mail notification

authentication mode is invalid.

“SMTP_AUTH” was forcibly set.

Description event queue is full (A274)

Meaning Event buffer for upload overflowed.

Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the

number of event occurrences.

Description buffer queue is full (A275)

Meaning Image buffer for upload overflowed.

Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the

number of event occurrences. Also

adjust the video quality, video size and

frame rate for upload.

238

Memory card warning

M201 Memory card is write-protected

[warning]

M203 Not enough space on memory card

[warning]

M204 Invalid file removed [warning]

M205 Checking management information file

[warning]

M206 Invalid management information

removed [warning]

M207 Memory card removed without

unmounting [warning]

ONVIF warning (RTP)

R101 RTP session timeout [notice]

R102 Information acquisition failure (RTP

payload size) [notice]

R102 Information acquisition failure (IP

address) [notice]

R103 RTSP authentication failure [notice]

R107 RTSP connection failure [notice]

Description Readonly filesystem (M201)

Meaning A write-protected memory card is

inserted.

Description There is not available space (M203)

Meaning Insufficient memory card capacity.

Description Invalid file (%1) was removed. (M204)

%1 Name of removed file

Meaning An invalid file was removed.

Description %1 checking management file (M205)

%1 Start | Finish

Meaning The memory card may have been

removed without being unmounted.

Start/finish checking management

information file.

Description Invalid db information(%1)(%2) was

removed(M206)

%1 Name of management information file

containing invalid information

%2 ID of invalid information

Meaning Invalid management information was

removed.

Description Memory card was pulled before

unmount. (M207)

Meaning Memory card was removed when

mounted.

Description session timeout: session ID=%1

(R101)

%1 Session ID

Meaning RTP session has timed out.

Description cannot get parameter:

RTP_payload_size (R102)

Meaning Information acquisition has failed (RTP

payload size).

Description cannot get parameter: IP_address

(R102)

Meaning Information acquisition has failed (IP

address).

Description RTSP authorization error (R103)

Meaning RTSP authentication has failed.

Description RTSP Error: error_code=%d: Service

Unavailable (R107)

%d 400: Value used for RTSP is invalid.

401: RTSP authentication failure or

missing valid authentication

information.

457: Playback time for RTSP is invalid.

501: An invalid RTSP option was used.

503: Failure to offer service, due to

insufficient resources.

The number of maximum RTP

sessions, has passed the limit.

Meaning RTSP connection has failed.

Appendix

239

Notification log

System notification

S001 System started [info]

S002 System settings changed [info]

S010 Event service started [info]

S011 Event service shut down [info]

S012 External device service started [info]

S013 External device service shut down

[info]

S014 Timer service started [info]

S015 Timer service shut down [info]

S017 qtimer service started or shut down

[info]

S030 Heater unit detected [info]

S070 Change to certificate [info]

wvhttp notification

W001 Starting and stopping of system [info]

W030 Startup and shutdown of WebView

Livescope Client [info]

Description starting paramd (S001)

Meaning Parameter management module

started.

Description Updated system settings. (S002)

Meaning Settings not requiring rebooting were

changed.

Description starting event (S010)

Meaning The event service was started.

Description shutdown event (S011)

Meaning The event service was shut down.

Description starting extio (S012)

Meaning The external device input/output

service was started.

Description shutdown extio (S013)

Meaning The external device input/output

service was shut down.

Description starting timer (S014)

Meaning The timer service was started.

Description shutdown timer (S015)

Meaning The timer service was shut down.

Description %1 qtimer (S017)

%1 (starting) or (stopping)

Meaning The qtimer service was started or shut

down.

Description The heater unit is detected. (S030)

Meaning A heater unit is attached.

Description %1: succeeded to %2 certificate

(S070)

%1 ssl or 802.1X

%2 generate | load | delete | restore

Meaning A certificate was generated/loaded/

deleted/restored

Description %1 webview (W001)

%1 Starting or stopping

Meaning wvhttp server (webview) has started or

stopped.

Description %1%2 host=<Host>, user=<User>,

prio=<Priority>(W030)

%1 W: WebView session, V: Session-less

video client, N: Session-less event

client

%2 +: Connect, -: Disconnect

Meaning The camera server client was

connected or disconnected.

240

W031 Transmitted video data size [info]

W040 Clearing to external memory [info]

Audio server notification

B001 Starting and stopping of audio server

[info]

B011 Audio client connected [info]

B012 Audio client closed [info]

Camera application notification

C001 Starting and stopping of camera control

module [info]

C002 Camera application started and

stopped [info]

Video notification

V001 Starting and stopping of video server

[info]

V020 Starting intelligent service [info]

V021 Shutting down intelligence service [info]

Uploader notification

A004 Starting and stopping of uploader [info]

A040 Number of uploads (MAIL) [info]

Description %1= host=<Host>, user=<User>,

video=<jpg|h264>:<Number of

frames> (W031)

1% W: WebView session, V: Session-less

video client

Meaning When a client disconnected, the total

data that was sent to the client

displayed in number of frames.

Description %1 the image storing - %2 (W040)

%1 Starting or stopping

%2 Reason for starting/stopping

Meaning Started or stopped clearing stream

recording to external memory.

Description %1 audio. (B001)

%1 starting | stopping

Meaning The audio server was started/shut

down.

Description [%1] %2 connected n=%3 (B011)

%1 Client type (send | recv)

%2 Client host IP address

%3 Total number of clients

Meaning An audio client was connected.

Description [%1] %2 closed n=%3 (B012)

%1 Client type (send | recv)

%2 Client host IP address

%3 Total number of clients

Meaning An audio client was disconnected.

Description %1 camerad (C001)

%1 starting | stopping

Meaning The camera control module started/

stopped.

Description starting cameraappl (C002)

Meaning The camera application started.

Description %1 video (V001)

%1 Starting or stopping

Meaning The video server was started/stopped.

Description starting intelligent. (V020)

Meaning Intelligent service was started.

Description shutdown intelligent. (V021)

Meaning Intelligent service was shut down.

Description %1 uploader (A004)

%1 Starting or stopping

Meaning The uploader was started or stopped.

Description uploader mail: normal=%1 test=%2

(A040)

%1 Number of normal uploads.

%2 Number of test uploads.

Meaning Shows the number of uploads

executed.

Appendix

241

A041 Number of uploads (FTP) [info]

A042 Number of uploads (HTTP) [info]

Memory card notification

M001 Starting and stopping of memory card

control module [info]

M002 Valid management information

inserted [info]

M003 Started/finished recreation of

management information [info]

ONVIF notification (RTP)

R001 Startup of RTP distribution module

[info]

R002 Stopping of RTP distribution module

[info]

R003 RTSP PLAY request received [info]

R004 RTSP TEARDOWN request received

[info]

Description uploader ftp: normal=%1 test=%2

(A041)

%1 Number of normal uploads.

%2 Number of test uploads.

Meaning Shows the number of uploads

executed.

Description uploader http: normal=%1 test=%2

(A042)

%1 Number of normal uploads.

%2 Number of test uploads.

Meaning Shows the number of uploads

executed.

Description %1 sdctrl (M001)

%1 Starting or stopping

Meaning The memory card control module

(sdctrl) has started or stopped.

Description Valid db information (%1)(%2)(%3)

was inserted (M002)

%1 Name of management information file

with inserted valid information

%2 Directory number of valid information

%3 File number of valid information

Meaning Added to management information as

it appears to be a valid video file.

Description %1 updating management file

(%2)(M003)

%1 Start | Finish

%2 Management information identification

number

Meaning Process to recreate management

information finished.

Description starting media_plane (R001)

Meaning RTP distribution module started.

Description stoppting media_plane (R002)

Meaning RTP distribution module stopped.

Description PLAY received: client_IP=%1,

profile=%2,

num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,

M=%6,BC=%7) (R003)

%1 Client IP address

%2 Profile name of requested PLAY

%3 Total number of client sessions

%4 Total distribution count of Video stream

%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream

%6 Total distribution count of Metadata

stream

%7 Total distribution count of

AudioBackChannel

Meaning RTSP PLAY request was received.

Description TEARDOWN received: client_IP=%1,

profile=%2,

num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,

M=%6,BC=%7) (R004)

%1 Client IP address

%2 Profile name of requested TEARDOWN

%3 Total number of client sessions

%4 Total distribution count of Video stream

%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream

%6 Total distribution count of Metadata

stream

%7 Total distribution count of

AudioBackChannel

Meaning RTSP TEARDOWN request was

received.

242

R005 Starting multicast [info]

R006 Stopping multicast [info]

Description start multicast: profile=%1,

num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,

M=%5,BC=%6) (R005)

%1 Client IP address

%2 Profile name of requested

MulticastStreaming START

%3 Total distribution count of Video stream

%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream

%5 Total distribution count of Metadata

stream

%6 Total distribution count of

AudioBackChannel

Meaning Multicast was started.

Description stop multicast: profile=%1,

num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,

M=%5,BC=%6) (R006)

%1 Client IP address

%2 Profile name of requested

MulticastStreaming STOP

%3 Total distribution count of Video stream

%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream

%5 Total distribution count of Metadata

stream

%6 Total distribution count of

AudioBackChannel

Meaning Multicast was stopped.

Appendix

243

Messages Displayed in the Information Display

Messages displayed in the information display of the Camera Viewer are classified into the following three types.

Warning Message

List of Viewer Messages

Icon Category Explanation

Information Message Displays help messages related to various buttons, pull-down lists, etc., as well as frame

rate and other information.

Warning Message Displays a message urging caution to the user when camera control privileges cannot be

obtained, the audio session stops, etc.

Error Message Displayed when a system error occurs in the viewer.

Message Explanation

The camera is busy. The connection limit was exceeded.

Failed to get camera control privileges. The request for camera control privileges was denied because the camera

was being used by the administrator, etc.

You are not connected to the camera. An attempt was made to operate the camera when the camera was not

connected.

Please get camera control privileges. An attempt was made to operate the camera without camera control

privileges.

Another user is already connected as an

administrator.

The administrator is already connected to the camera.

No audio device. The [Audio Reception] button or [Audio Transmission] button was clicked

while the computer audio device was unavailable or disabled.

Insufficient memory card capacity. An attempt was made to manually record to a memory card with insufficient

capacity.

Recording to memory card is not allowed. Recording to the memory card failed because [Memory Card Operation

Status] > [Operation Settings] was not set to [Save Logs and Videos].

You cannot control the camera unless you exit

Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ.

The video display area was clicked with the Digital PTZ or Viewer PTZ

enabled.

You cannot control the camera unless you exit

Viewer PTZ.

The video display area was clicked with the Viewer PTZ enabled.

Start Digital PTZ or Viewer PTZ. You clicked the pan/tilt slider, zoom slider, or video display area with the

Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ disabled.

Waiting for control privileges. A general user is waiting to obtain control.

Recreating video management information. The video management information on the memory card is being recreated.

User authentication failed. User authentication failed, or the [Audio Transmission] button was clicked

with [Audio Distribution] cleared for an authorized user in [User Authority]

when connecting as an authorized user.

Failed to initialize the ActiveX plugin. When the ActiveX plug-in is not installed after starting the Camera Viewer,

the Camera Viewer waits 10 seconds for the plug-in to be installed, but the

plug-in was not installed after 10 seconds.

JavaScript is not available or disabled on your

web browser.

JavaScript could not be used in the web browser.

R13

M50

H652

H651

M50

R13

R12

H652 H651

244

Currently in the process of starting or ending

audio transmission and receiving.

Attempted to start or stop audio transmission while already processing

starting or stopping of audio transmission and reception.

Cannot be controlled, because it is set to fixed at

infinity mode.

You tried to operate the focus when [Focus] was set to [Fixed at infinity].

Cannot be controlled, because it is set to manual

mode.

You tried to operate the Back Light Compensation button or exposure

compensation when [Exposure] was set to [Manual], or [Smart Shade

Control] was set to [Auto].

You do not have video reception permission. A user without video reception privileges tried to connect to the camera.

Cannot be controlled, because Clear IR Mode is

enabled.

You tried to operate Day/Night with [Clear IR Mode] enabled.

Audio reception is restricted. You clicked the audio reception button when [Server] > [Audio Server] >

[Audio Transmission from the Camera] was set to [Disable].

Audio transmission is restricted. You clicked the audio transmission button when [Server] > [Audio Server] >

[Audio Reception from Viewer] was set to [Disable].

Your web browser is not supported. You started the Camera Viewer with an unsupported web browser.

ActiveX is disabled. ActiveX is disabled in the web browser settings or system functions cannot

be accessed from ActiveX due to security settings.

Message Explanation

R13

M50

H652

H651

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

Appendix

245

If you have forgotten the settings and want to set the camera from the beginning, restore the factory default settings first.

It is recommended that you use [Setting Page] > [Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore] to create a backup file before

restoring the factory default settings (P. 220).

Note

• Settings can also be backed up using the Camera Management Tool. For details on using the Camera Management Tool, please refer to

“Camera Management Tool User Manual”.

• For factory default settings, please refer to P. 248.

Restoring the Initial Settings from a Web Browser

Use [Maintenance] > [General] > [Initialization] > [Network Settings] > [Do not save] on the Setting Page (P. 218).

Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera

If you have forgotten or do not know the IP address of the camera or your Administrator password, you cannot operate the

camera via the network. In this case, reset the camera.

Prepare the camera for being reset in advance.

In order to press the reset switch or reboot switch, it may be necessary to remove items such as the dome case or cover.

For details, please refer to “Installation Guide” included with the camera.

VB-R13VE/VB-R12VE/VB-M50B/VB-H651V

When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.

Restoring Factory Default Settings

Important

If you restore default settings, you will become unable to connect to the camera because the administrator account is also initialized. Use

the Camera Management Tool to configure the initial settings (P. 38).

Hold down the reset switch while pressing the reboot switch with a pointed object.

Release the reboot switch after at least three seconds while still holding down the reset switch.

Release the reset switch when the LED (blue) starts flashing.

Reset Switch

LED

Reboot Switch

VB-R13VE/VB-R12VE VB-M50B

Reset Switch

LED

Reboot Switch

246

VB-R13

The camera does not have a power switch. To turn the camera on or off, connect or disconnect the power cable.

The LED will flash.

When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.

Reset Switch

LED

Reboot Switch

VB-H651V

Turn the camera off.

Hold down the reset switch and connect the power cable. Continue to hold the reset switch for five seconds or

longer.

Release the reset switch.

Reset Switch

LED

Appendix

247

VB-H652LVE

When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.

Incline the installation adjustment switch to the RESET position while pressing the reboot switch with a pointed

object.

Release the reboot switch after at least three seconds while still inclining the installation adjustment switch.

Release the installation adjustment switch when the LED starts flashing.

Installation Adjustment Switch

Reboot Switch

LED

248

List of Factory Default Settings

Item Setting

•LAN

LAN Interface Auto

Maximum Packet Size 1500

•IPv4

IPv4 Address Setting Method Auto (DHCP)

IPv4 Address 192.168.100.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

IPv4 Default Gateway Address

AutoIP Enable

IPv4 Address (AutoIP)

•IPv6

IPv6 Enable

Auto (RA) Enable

Auto (DHCPv6) Enable

IPv6 Address (Manual)

Prefix Length 64

IPv6 Default Gateway Address

IPv6 Address (Auto)

• DNS

Name Server Address 1

Name Server Address 2

Auto-Setting of Name Server

Address

Disable

Host Name

Host Name Registration with

DDNS

Disable

Search Domain

Search Domain List

• mDNS

Use mDNS Enable

• Administrator Account

Administrator Name

Password

•User Authority

Authorized User Camera Control Video Distribution and

Privileged Camera

Control

Guest User Camera Control Video Distribution and

Camera Control

Authorized User Audio Distribution Yes

R13

M50

H652

H651

Guest User Audio Distribution Yes

• Current Date and Time

• Setting

Setting Method Set manually

Auto-Setting of NTP Server Disable

NTP Server

Time zone (GMT+09:00) Osaka,

Sapporo, Tokyo

Daylight Saving Time Disable



• All Videos

Video Size Set 1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /

480 x 270

•JPEG

Video Quality: 480 x 270 6

Video Quality: 960 x 540 6

Video Quality: 1920 x 1080 6

Video Quality: Digital PTZ 6

Video Size: video Transmission 1920 x 1080

Maximum Frame Rate: Video

Transmission

15.0

Video Size: Upload / Memory card 480 x 270

• H.264(1)

Video Size 1920 x 1080

Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control

Target Bit Rate (kbps) 3072

Video Quality 6

Frame Rate (fps) 15

I Frame Interval (sec) 1

• H.264(2)

Enable in H.264(2) Disable

Video Size 480 x 270

Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control

Target Bit Rate (kbps) 1024

Video Quality 6

Frame Rate (fps) 15

I Frame Interval (sec) 1



• All Videos

Item Setting

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

R12

H652 H651

H652

H651

M50

Appendix

249

Video Size Set 1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 /

320 x 180

•JPEG

Video Quality: 320x180 6

Video Quality: 640x360 6

Video Quality: 1280x720 6

Video Quality: Digital PTZ 6

Video Size: video Transmission 1280 x 720

Maximum Frame Rate: Video

Transmission

15.0

Video Size: Upload /

Memory card

320 x 180

• H.264(1)

Video Size 1280 x 720

Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control

Target Bit Rate (kbps) 3072

Video Quality 6

Frame Rate (fps) 15

I Frame Interval (sec) 1

• H.264(2)

H.264(2) Disable

Video Size 320 x 180

Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control

Target Bit Rate (kbps) 1024

Video Quality 6

Frame Rate (fps) 15

I Frame Interval (sec) 1

• General

Default Page Display Setting Page

•Viewer Settings

User Authentication Authenticate

Rotate Video Display Do not rotate

• Camera Name

Camera Name (alphanumeric

characters)

Camera

• Camera Control

Digital Zoom Disable

Enhanced Digital Zoom Disable

Maximum Digital Zoom

Magnification

Image Stabilizer Disable

Smart Shade Control Strength

(Auto)

Medium

Item Setting

H652 H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

Haze Compensation Strength

(Auto)

Medium

Infrared Light Strength (Auto) Strong

Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction Disable

Pan/Tilt Speed Control Control by zoom

position

Auto Flip Enable

• Day/Night (when Auto is set)

Switching Brightness Standard

Response (sec.) 20

• Installation Conditions

LED Setting Turn On

Image Flip Disable

• Camera Position Control

Restricted to Presets No Restriction

Camera Position without Control Do not return to Home

Position

• External Input Device 1

Device Name (alphanumeric

characters)

• External Input Device 2

Device Name (alphanumeric

characters)

• External Output Device 1

Device Name (alphanumeric

characters)

• External Output Device 2

Device Name (alphanumeric

characters)

• Camera position

Pan/Tilt/Zoom position Register

Digital PTZ Position Unregister

• Camera Settings

Focus Auto

Manual

Exposure Auto

AGC Limit 6

Slow Shutter Disable

Shutter Speed 1/100

Aperture 11

Item Setting

H652

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

250

Gain 9

Exposure Compensation 0

Metering Mode Center-Weighted

Smart Shade Control Disable

Smart Shade Control Level 1 (Mild)

White Balance Auto

R Gain 255

B Gain 255

Noise Reduction Standard

Sharpness 3

Color Saturation 4

Haze Compensation Disable

Haze Compensation Level 4

Clear IR Mode Disable

Day/Night Day Mode

Use Infrared Day/Night Operation

Infrared Light Level 1 (Mild)

• Day/Night Mode Focus

Day/Night Mode Focus Control Use One-shot AF

Light Source Fluorescent

• Camera Control

Day/Night Day Mode

• Panorama Creation Area

Specify the panorama creation

area

Not specified

• Capture Settings

Exposure Lock Center

White Balance Lock Do not lock

Focus Lock Do not lock

• Restrict View

View Restrictions Disable

• Preset Registration

Pan/Tilt/Zoom position Register

Digital PTZ Position Register

Camera Settings Register

Unregister

Preset Name (alphanumeric

characters)

preset 1

Show in Viewers Enable

• Route List/Route

Item Setting

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

R13 R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

H652 H651

R13 R12

M50

H652 H651

Effective Conditions Not used

Route Name (alphanumeric

characters)

Specify Active Time Not specified

Start Time 00:00

End Time 00:00

Reverse Route Disable

• Edit Tour Route

Speed (PT) 20 (Fast)

Speed (Z) 8(Fast)

Pause Duration 0

• Specified Area

Area 1 (Pink) Disable

Area 2 (Purple) Disable

Area 3 (Blue) Disable

Area 4 (Cyan) Disable

Area 5 (Green) Disable

Area 6 (Yellow) Disable

Area 7 (Orange) Disable

Area 8 (White) Disable

•ADSR

Enable in H.264(1) Disable

Enable in H.264(2) Disable

Data Size Reduction Level Hight

• On-screen display

Date display Disable

Position of date display Upper left

Format of date display YYYY/MM/DD

Time display Disable

Position of time display Upper left

Text display Display nothing

Position of text display Upper left

Text string display

Color of text White

Background color Black

Color depth of text and

background

Fill text and

background color

• Mask area

Area Enable

• All privacy masks

Color Black

Item Setting

R13 R12

M50

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12 M50

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

Appendix

251

• General Sound

Input Volume 50

Output Volume 50

Echo Canceller Disable

Audio Input Line In

• Sound Clip Upload 1

Sound Clip Name

• Sound Clip Upload 2

Sound Clip Name

• Sound Clip Upload 3

Sound Clip Name

• HTTP Server

Authentication Method Digest Authentication

HTTP Port 80

HTTPS Port 443

•SNMP Server

Use SNMP v1 and v2c Disable

Use SNMP v3 Disable

Administrator Contact Information

Administration Function Name

VB-R13VE/VB-R13

VB-R12VE

VB-M50B

VB-H652LVE

VB-H651V

Installation Location

Security Level No authentication and

no encryption

Authentication Algorithm MD5

Encryption Algorithm DES

• SNMP v1 and v2c Server

Community Name

• SNMP v3 Server

User Name

Security Level No authentication and

no encryption

Authentication Algorithm MD5

Encryption Algorithm DES

• FTP Server

Use FTP Server Disable

Item Setting

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

H652

H651

User Name

•WS-Security

Check Time on Authentication Check

• Video Server

Maximum Number of Clients 30

Camera Control Queue Length 30

Maximum Connection Time (sec.) 0

Camera Control Time (sec.) 20

• Audio Server

Audio Transmission from the

Camera

Disable

Voice Activity Detection Disable

Audio Reception from Viewer Disable

• RTP Server

RTP Enable

RTSP Authentication Method Digest Authentication

RTSP Port 554

• Audio Multicast

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

• RTP Streaming 1

Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*

Frame Rate 5

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

Audio Transmission Disable

• RTP Streaming 2

Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*

Frame Rate 10

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

Audio Transmission Disable

• RTP Streaming 3

Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*

Frame Rate 15

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

* VB-M50B is set to 320x180 JPEG.

Item Setting

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652 H651

252

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

Audio Transmission Disable

• RTP Streaming 4

Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*

Frame Rate 30

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

Audio Transmission Disable

• RTP Streaming 5

Video Size H.264(1)

Frame rate 5

Multicast Address 0.0.0.0

Multicast Port 0

Multicast TTL 1

Audio Transmission Disable

• Video Record Setting

Video Record Action Upload

• General Upload

Upload Upload Disabled

Video Format JPEG

Frame Rate 1

Pre-event Buffer (number of

frames)

Post-event Buffer (number of

frames)

Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0

Post-event Buffer (sec) 0

• HTTP Upload

Notification Notification Only with

HTTP

URI

User Name

Proxy Server

Proxy Port 80

Proxy User Name

Parameter (query string)

• FTP Upload

Notification Video data upload with

FTP

FTP Server

Item Setting

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

H652

H651

User Name

PASV Mode Enable

File Upload Path

File Naming YYYYMMDDHHMMSS

Maximum Number of Loops 0

Subdirectory Name to Create

File Name to Create image.jpg

File Name to Create video.mov

• E-mail Notification

Notification Text Only

Mail Server Name

Mail Server Port 25

Sender (From)

Recipient (To)

Authentication None

User Name

POP Server

Subject

Message Body

• External Device Output 1

Operation Mode Normally Open

Active Output Format Continuous

Pulse Output Time (sec) 1

• External Device Output 2

Operation Mode Normally Open

Active Output Format Continuous

Pulse Output Time (sec) 1

• External Device Input

External Device Input Event Enable

• External Device Input 1

Operation Mode Normally Open

Active Event Operation Disable

Inactive Event Operation Disable

Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable

Preset

None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for Active

Event

Disable

External Device Output for Inactive

Event

Disable

* VB-M50B is set to 320x180 JPEG.

Item Setting

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

Appendix

253

Audio Playback at Active Event Disable

Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable

Sound Clip

Volume 50

Switch Day/Night Disable

• External Device Input 2

Operation Mode Normally Open

Active Event Operation Disable

Inactive Event Operation Disable

Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for Active

Event

Disable

External Device Output for Inactive

Event

Disable

Audio Playback at Active Event Disable

Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable

Sound Clip

Volume 50

Switch Day/Night Disable

• Volume Detection

Volume Detection Event Disable

Detect Criteria The reference volume

level or above

Reference Volume Level 50

Detect Criteria Duration (sec) 0

ON Event Operation Disable

OFF Event Operation Disable

Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

External Device Output for OFF

Event

Disable

• Scream Detection

Scream Detection Event Disable

ON Event Operation Disable

Preset

None

Video Record Disable

Item Setting

R13

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

M50

R13 M50

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

•Timer 1

Timer Event Disable

24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable

Start Time 00:00

End Time 00:00

Repeat Interval None

•Operation

Start Time Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output Disable

Switch Day/Night Disable

•Timer 2

Timer Event Disable

24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable

Start Time 00:00

End Time 00:00

Repeat Interval None

•Operation

Start Time Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output Disable

•Timer 3

Timer Event Disable

24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable

Start Time 00:00

End Time 00:00

Repeat Interval None

•Operation

Start Time Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output Disable

•Timer 4

Timer Event Disable

Item Setting

R13

R12

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

R13

R12

M50

R13

M50

H652

H651

254

24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable

Start Time 00:00

End Time 00:00

Repeat Interval None

•Operation

Start Time Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output Disable

• Operation Mode

Mode Video Detection



Video Detection

• Display Options

Detection Area/Line Selected Detection

Settings Only

Non-detection Area Only enabled non-

detection areas

Detection Results Selected Detection

Settings Only

• Camera Position Settings

Lock camera position Cleared



Auto Tracking

• Display Options

Detection Area Display

Detection Results Display

• Camera Position Settings

Specify the initial camera position Cleared

• Day/Night Mode Switching

Preset when Switching to Day

Mode

None

Preset when Switching to Night

Mode

None

• Linked Event 1

Linked Event Disable

Event Linking Method AND

Event Order None

Event Gap (seconds) 2

Event 1

Event Type External Device Input

External Device Input Input 1

Status Active

Event 2

Item Setting

R13 R12

M50

R13 M50

H652

H651

R13 R12

R13

R12

M50

R13

R12

R13

M50

H652

H651

Event Type Intelligent Function

Intelligent Function Setting 1

Status On

Operation

ON Event Operation Disable

OFF Event Operation Disable

Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

External Device Output for OFF

Event

Disable

Audio Playback at ON Event Disable

Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable

Sound Clip

Volume 50

• Linked Event 2

Linked Event Disable

Event Linking Method AND

Event Order None

Event Gap (seconds) 2

Event 1

Event Type External Device Input

External Device Input Input 1

Status Active

Event 2

Event Type Intelligent Function

Intelligent Function Setting 1

Status On

Operation

ON Event Operation Disable

OFF Event Operation Disable

Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

External Device Output for OFF

Event

Disable

Audio Playback at ON Event Disable

Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable

Item Setting

R13

M50

R13

M50

Appendix

255

Sound Clip

Volume 50

• Linked Event 3

Linked Event Disable

Event Linking Method AND

Event Order None

Event Gap (seconds) 2

Event 1

Event Type External Device Input

External Device Input Input 1

Status Active

Event 2

Event Type Intelligent Function

Intelligent Function Setting 1

Status On

Operation

ON Event Operation Disable

OFF Event Operation Disable

Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

External Device Output for OFF

Event

Disable

Audio Playback at ON Event Disable

Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable

Sound Clip

Volume 50

• Linked Event 4

Linked Event Disable

Event Linking Method AND

Event Order None

Event Gap (seconds) 2

Event 1

Event Type External Device Input

External Device Input Input 1

Status Active

Event 2

Event Type Intelligent Function

Intelligent Function Setting 1

Status On

Item Setting

R13

M50

Operation

ON Event Operation Disable

OFF Event Operation Disable

Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable

Preset None

Video Record Disable

E-mail Notification Disable

External Device Output for ON

Event

Disable

External Device Output for OFF

Event

Disable

Audio Playback at ON Event Disable

Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable

Sound Clip

Volume 50

• IPv4 Host Access Restrictions

Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable

Default Policy Authorize Access

Network Address / Subnet 01: / 32 Yes

02: / 32 Yes

03: / 32 Yes

04: / 32 Yes

05: / 32 Yes

06: / 32 Yes

07: / 32 Yes

08: / 32 Yes

09: / 32 Yes

10: / 32 Yes

11: / 32 Yes

12: / 32 Yes

13: / 32 Yes

14: / 32 Yes

15: / 32 Yes

16: / 32 Yes

17: / 32 Yes

18: / 32 Yes

19: / 32 Yes

20: / 32 Yes

• IPv6 Host Access Restrictions

Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable

Default Policy Authorize Access

Prefix / Prefix Length 01: / 128 Yes

02: / 128 Yes

Item Setting

R13

M50

256

03: / 128 Yes

04: / 128 Yes

05: / 128 Yes

06: / 128 Yes

07: / 128 Yes

08: / 128 Yes

09: / 128 Yes

10: / 128 Yes

11: / 128 Yes

12: / 128 Yes

13: / 128 Yes

14: / 128 Yes

15: / 128 Yes

16: / 128 Yes

17: / 128 Yes

18: / 128 Yes

19: / 128 Yes

20: / 128 Yes

• Certificates

Certificate Status Not Installed

Country (C)

State/Province (ST)

Locality (L)

Organization (O)

Organizational Unit (OU)

Common Name (CN)

Validity Period Start Date

Validity Period End Date

• Encrypted Communications

HTTPS Connection Policy HTTP

• 802.1X Authentication

802.1X Authentication Disable

Authentication Status Stop

• Authentication Method

Authentication Method EAP-MD5

User Name

•IPsec

IPsec Auto Key Exchange

• Auto Key Exchange Settings

IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES

IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

IPsec SA Validity Period (min) 480

Item Setting

ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES

ISAKMP SA Authentication

Algorithm

SHA1

DH Group Group 14->Group 5->

Group 2

ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min) 480

• IPsec Set 1

IPsec Set Disable

IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode

Destination IPv4 Address

Destination IPv6 Address

Source IPv4 Address

Source IPv6 Address

Security Protocol ESP

Security Gateway IPv4 Address

Security Gateway IPv6 Address

Destination Subnet Mask Length 16

Destination Prefix Length 16

IKE Pre-Shared Key

SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES

SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA ESP SPI (outbound)

SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA ESP SPI (inbound)

SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA AH Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA AH SPI (outbound)

SA AH Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA AH SPI (inbound)

• IPsec Set 2

IPsec Set Disable

IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode

Destination IPv4 Address

Destination IPv6 Address

Source IPv4 Address

Source IPv6 Address

Security Protocol ESP

Item Setting

Appendix

257

Security Gateway IPv4 Address

Security Gateway IPv6 Address

Destination Subnet Mask Length 16

Destination Prefix Length 16

IKE Pre-Shared Key

SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES

SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA ESP SPI (outbound)

SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA ESP SPI (inbound)

SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA AH Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA AH SPI (outbound)

SA AH Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA AH SPI (inbound)

• IPsec Set 3

IPsec Set Disable

IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode

Destination IPv4 Address

Destination IPv6 Address

Source IPv4 Address

Source IPv6 Address

Security Protocol ESP

Security Gateway IPv4 Address

Security Gateway IPv6 Address

Destination Subnet Mask Length 16

Destination Prefix Length 16

IKE Pre-Shared Key

SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES

SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA ESP SPI (outbound)

SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(inbound)

Item Setting

SA ESP SPI (inbound)

SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA AH Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA AH SPI (outbound)

SA AH Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA AH SPI (inbound)

• IPsec Set 4

IPsec Set Disable

IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode

Destination IPv4 Address

Destination IPv6 Address

Source IPv4 Address

Source IPv6 Address

Security Protocol ESP

Security Gateway IPv4 Address

Security Gateway IPv6 Address

Destination Subnet Mask Length 16

Destination Prefix Length 16

IKE Pre-Shared Key

SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES

SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA ESP SPI (outbound)

SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA ESP SPI (inbound)

SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA AH Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA AH SPI (outbound)

SA AH Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA AH SPI (inbound)

• IPsec Set 5

IPsec Set Disable

IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode

Destination IPv4 Address

Destination IPv6 Address

Source IPv4 Address

Item Setting

258

Source IPv6 Address

Security Protocol ESP

Security Gateway IPv4 Address

Security Gateway IPv6 Address

Destination Subnet Mask Length 16

Destination Prefix Length 16

IKE Pre-Shared Key

SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES

SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA ESP SPI (outbound)

SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)

SA ESP Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA ESP SPI (inbound)

SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96

SA AH Authentication Key

(outbound)

SA AH SPI (outbound)

SA AH Authentication Key

(inbound)

SA AH SPI (inbound)

• Video Record Setting

Video Record Action Upload

• Memory Card Operations

Operation Settings Save Logs and Videos

Video Format JPEG

Pre-event Buffer (number of

frames)

Post-event Buffer (number of

frames)

Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0

Post-event Buffer (sec) 0

Overwrite videos Disable

Auto Video Delete Disable

Days Saved 30

Delete Time 00:00

• Initialization

Network Settings Save

• Backup / Restore

Save Destination Memory Card

• Update Firmware

Item Setting

Revert to Initial Settings Do Not Restore

• Log Notifications

Use log notifications Disable

Notification Level Error

Mail Server Name

Mail Server Port 25

Sender (From)

Recipient (To)

Authentication None

User Name

POP Server

Subject

Item Setting

259

Appendix

Numerics

802.1X Authentication ...................................... 209

Abandoned Object Detection .................. 170, 182

Access Restrictions ........................................... 55

Adjust Focus ............................................ 114, 121

Administrator ...................................................... 55

Administrator Account ............................... 39, 100

Administrator Password ............................. 40, 100

ADSR ................................................................ 139

AGC Limit ......................................................... 115

Aperture ........................................................... 115

Area Zoom ......................................................... 69

Audio Detection ................................. 85, 164, 172

Audio Distribution ....................................... 55, 101

Audio Input ....................................................... 148

Audio Multicast ................................................ 154

Audio Reception ........................................ 82, 153

Audio Server .................................................... 153

Audio Transmission .................................... 82, 153

Authentication Method ............................. 149, 209

Authority ........................................................... 101

Authorized User ......................................... 55, 100

Auto Flip ........................................................... 109

Auto Key Exchange ......................................... 211

Auto Tracking ........................................... 173, 192

Auto Video Delete ............................................ 216

AutoIP ................................................................. 97

Back Light Compensation .................................. 73

Back Up Settings ............................................. 220

Basic Camera Settings ...................................... 40

Bit Rate Control ................................................ 105

Camera Angle .................................................... 45

Camera Control .......................................... 55, 101

Camera Control Privileges ................................. 67

Camera Management Tool .......................... 21, 38

Camera Name .................................................. 108

Camera Operation

Clear IR Mode .............................................. 73

Day/Night ..................................................... 73

Exposure Compensation ............................. 72

Focus ........................................................... 72

Pan ............................................................... 71

Pan/Tilt Speed ............................................. 71

Tilt ................................................................ 71

Zoom ............................................................ 71

Zoom Speed ................................................ 71

Camera Tampering Detection .................. 171, 185

Camera Viewer ............................................. 51, 52

Certificate Information ...................................... 209

Certificate Management ........................... 207, 210

Clear IR Mode ............................................ 73, 118

Client ................................................................ 209

Color Saturation ............................................... 117

Control Privileges ............................................... 67

Custom Installation ............................................. 31

Date .................................................................. 102

Day Mode ........................................... 73, 118, 122

Day/Night ................................... 73, 110, 118, 121

Day/Night Mode Focus .................................... 120

Daylight Saving Time ....................................... 103

Default Gateway Address ............................ 97, 98

Default Page .................................................... 107

Detection Area ......................................... 175, 190

Detection Criteria ..................................... 164, 179

Detection Lines ........................................ 186, 190

Detection Type ......................................... 170, 176

Detections Settings .......................................... 190

Device Information ........................................... 218

Device Name ................................................... 111

DHCP ................................................................. 96

DHCPv6 ............................................................. 97

Digital PTZ .......................................................... 76

Digital Zoom ............................................... 68, 108

Display Options ................................................ 190

Display Size ....................................................... 63

DNS .................................................................... 98

Drag to Move ..................................................... 70

Easy Installation ................................................. 31

Index

260

Echo Canceller ................................................. 147

E-mail Notification 160, 162, 165, 166, 168, 197, 201

Encrypted Communications ............................. 207

Enhanced Digital Zoom ............................. 68, 108

Error Message .................................................. 243

Event ................................................................ 197

Event and Input/Output

Audio Detection ........................................... 85

Auto Tracking .............................................. 85

External Device Input .................................. 84

External Device Output ............................... 84

Image Detection .......................................... 84

Linked Events .............................................. 85

Event Display ..................................................... 84

Exposure .......................................................... 115

Exposure Compensation ............................ 72, 115

External Device Input ................................. 84, 162

External Device Output .................................... 161

External Input Device ....................................... 111

External Output Device .................................... 111

Factory Default Settings ........................... 245, 248

Firewall ............................................................... 33

Firmware .................................................. 218, 221

Focus ......................................................... 72, 113

Format .............................................................. 217

Frame Rate ....................................... 106, 155, 157

FTP Server ........................................................ 150

FTP Upload ...................................................... 158

Full Screen Display ............................................ 64

Full Video Display Area .................................... 136

Gain .................................................................. 115

Guest User ................................................. 55, 101

H.264 Video ......................................... 22, 63, 139

H.264(1) ........................................................... 105

H.264(2) ........................................................... 106

Haze Compensation ........................................ 117

Haze Compensation Strength .......................... 109

Home Position ............................................ 74, 111

Host Access Restrictions ......................... 204, 205

HTTP Port ......................................................... 149

HTTP Server ..................................................... 149

HTTP Upload .................................................... 157

HTTPS Connection Policy ................................ 207

HTTPS Port ....................................................... 149

I Frame Interval ................................................ 106

Image Detection ................................................. 84

Image Flip ........................................................ 111

Image Stabilizer ............................................... 108

Information Display ............................................ 62

Information Message ....................................... 243

Infrared Filter .................................................... 118

Infrared Light Level .......................................... 119

Infrared Light Strength ..................................... 109

Initial Setting ............................................... 38, 112

Input Volume .................................................... 147

Installation .......................................................... 30

Installation Guide ................................................. 5

Intelligent Function

Auto Tracking ............................................ 192

Detections Settings .................................... 190

Display Options ......................................... 190

Operation Mode ......................................... 173

Restart ....................................................... 198

Video Detection ......................................... 175

Intrusion Detection ................................... 172, 188

IPsec ................................................................ 211

IPv4 .................................................................... 96

IPv4 Address ...................................................... 97

IPv6 .................................................................... 97

JPEG Video ................................................ 64, 105

LAN .................................................................... 96

Language Switch Button .................................... 88

LED .................................................................. 111

License ............................................................. 218

Linked Event .............................................. 85, 200

Lock camera position ....................................... 175

Log ................................................................... 222

Log Messages ................................................. 230

Main

Language .................................................... 59

Mobile Camera Viewer ................................ 59

Setting Page ................................................ 59

Switch Users ................................................ 59

Maintenance .................................................... 218

261

Appendix

Maximum Digital Zoom Magnification .............. 108

Maximum Frame Rate ...................................... 105

Maximum Number of Clients ............................ 152

Maximum Packet Size ........................................ 96

mDNS ................................................................. 99

Memory Card ............................................. 20, 215

Memory Card Capacity .................................... 217

Memory Card Information ................................ 217

Message

Error Message ........................................... 243

Information Message ................................. 243

Log Message ............................................. 230

Warning Message ..................................... 243

Metering Mode ................................................. 116

Mobile Camera Viewer ............................. 5, 21, 25

Modifier ............................................................ 226

Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction ................... 109

Mounted ........................................................... 215

Moving Object Detection ......................... 170, 181

Multicast DNS .................................................... 99

Name Server Address ........................................ 98

Network .............................................................. 96

Network Address / Subnet ............................... 204

Night Mode ........................................ 73, 118, 122

Noise Reduction ............................................... 117

Non-Detection Area ................................. 177, 190

NTP Server ....................................................... 102

One-shot AF ............................................. 114, 121

One-shot WB .................................................... 117

On-screen display ............................................ 141

Operation Mode ....................................... 161, 162

Operation Settings ........................................... 216

Output Volume ................................................. 147

Overwrite videos .............................................. 216

Pan ......................................................... 48, 68, 70

Panorama ......................................................... 123

Panorama Display Panel .................................... 71

Panorama Screen ...................................... 91, 135

Parameter ......................................................... 226

Passing Detection .................................... 171, 186

Password ................................................... 53, 100

Post-event Buffer ...................................... 157, 216

Pre-event Buffer ....................................... 157, 216

Prefix .......................................................... 97, 205

Preset ........................... 74, 78, 131, 162, 165, 201

Start Time Preset ....................................... 167

When switching Day/Night Mode .............. 199

Preset Name .................................................... 132

Preset Selection Menu ....................................... 74

Preset Tour ....................................................... 134

Privacy Mask .................................................... 143

Privileged Camera Control ......................... 55, 101

Pulse ................................................................ 161

Reboot .............................................................. 218

Reconnect .......................................................... 91

Recorded Video Utility ............................. 5, 21, 81

Recording Manually ........................................... 80

Recording to a Memory Card ............................. 80

Reference Volume Level .................................. 164

Refresh Drive System ....................................... 218

Removed Object Detection ...................... 170, 183

Reset Switch .................................................... 245

Restore Settings ............................................... 220

Restrict View .................................................... 127

Revert to Initial Settings ................................... 219

RM-Lite ............................................................... 22

Rotate Video Display ........................................ 107

Rotation .............................................................. 48

RTP ................................................................... 154

RTSP ................................................................ 154

Scream Detection ............................................ 165

Self-Signed Certificate ..................................... 206

Setting Menus .............................................. 88, 92

Setting Page ....................................................... 21

Setup CD-ROM .............................................. 5, 21

Sharpness ........................................................ 117

Shutter Speed .................................................. 115

Simple Camera Setting .................................... 113

Slow Shutter ..................................................... 115

Smart Shade Control ........................................ 116

Smart Shade Control Level .............................. 116

Smart Shade Control Strength ......................... 109

Snapshot ...................................................... 79, 91

SNMP Server .................................................... 149

Sound Clip Upload ........................................... 148

Specify the initial camera position ................... 192

262

SSL/TLS Certificate .......................................... 206

Still Image .......................................................... 79

Subnet Mask ...................................................... 97

Switch Day/Night .............................. 163, 168, 199

Target Bit Rate ................................................. 105

Tilt ........................................................... 48, 68, 70

Time ................................................................. 102

Time Zone ........................................................ 103

Timer ................................................................ 167

Tour Route Settings .......................................... 136

Tracking Conditions ......................................... 193

Troubleshooting ............................................... 228

Trusted Sites ................................................ 34, 41

Unmounted ...................................................... 215

Upload ............................................................. 156

Use Infrared ..................................................... 118

User Account ................................................... 100

User Authentication .................................... 53, 107

User Authority .................................................. 101

User List ........................................................... 100

User Management ........................................... 100

User Name ................................................. 53, 100

User Page .......................................................... 94

Video and Audio

Audio Reception .................................... 59, 65

Audio Transmission ............................... 59, 65

Display Size ................................................. 59

Display Size Setting ..................................... 63

H.264 ........................................................... 63

Maximum Frame Rate ................................. 64

Video Size .................................................... 59

Video Size Setting ....................................... 63

Video Detection ................................ 170, 173, 175

Video Display Area ................................ 47, 58, 90

Video Distribution ....................................... 55, 101

Video Format ............................................ 157, 216

Video Management Information ....................... 217

Video Output ...................................................... 95

Video Quality .................................................... 105

Video Record ................... 162, 165, 166, 168, 201

Video Record Action ................................ 156, 215

Video Saving .................................................... 217

Video Server ..................................................... 152

Video Size .......................................... 63, 105, 155

Video Size Set .................................................. 104

Viewer

Camera Viewer ...................................... 21, 51

Mobile Camera Viewer ............................ 5, 21

RM-Lite Viewer ............................................. 22

Viewer Message ............................................... 243

Viewer PTZ ......................................................... 75

Voice Activity Detection ................................... 153

Volume ......................................... 82, 83, 163, 198

Volume Detection ............................................. 164

Warning Message ............................................ 243

White Balance .................................................. 116

WS-Security ...................................................... 151

Zoom ...................................................... 48, 68, 70

BIE-7128-000